Mercedes - C 30 AMG - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017

Your Operator's Manuals Digitally - in the vehicle Get to grips with the content of the Digital Operator's Manual in the multimedia system fitted in your vehicle (under the "Vehicle" menu item). Printed manual - in the vehicle In addition to the vehicle Operator's Manual, the complete additional operating instructions for your multimedia system are also available from your Mercedes-Benz Service Center. Digitally - via the Internet You will find the Operator's Manual on your Mercedes-Benz homepage. Digitally - as an App The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free in the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Apple® iOS AndroidTM É2055848907OËÍ 2055848907 Order no. P205 0300 13 Part no. 205 584 89 07 Edition A 2017 C-Class Coupe Operator's Manual C-Class Coupe Operator's Manual Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG Inc. is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RBurmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: RDTS™ (Y page) YY Dis‐ play This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page. This text indicates a message on the multifunction display/multimedia display. Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. This symbol indicates an instruction X that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succession X indicate an instruction with several steps. As at 28.09.2015 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RDigital Operator's Manual RPrinted Operator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Operator's Manual: Digital form inside the vehicle The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multimedia system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Digital form via the Internet The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options. Digital form as an App Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tablets. Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 2055848907 É2055848907OËÍ 2 Contents Index ....................................................... 4 Digital Operator's Manual .................. 25 Introduction ........................................... 25 Operation ............................................... 25 Mirrors ................................................. 103 Memory function ................................. 105 Lights and windshield wipers .......... Exterior lighting ................................... Interior lighting .................................... Replacing bulbs ................................... Windshield wipers ................................ 107 107 110 111 113 Climate control ................................. Overview of climate control systems ... Operating the climate control systems .................................................... Air vents .............................................. 116 116 124 124 124 133 134 143 145 148 153 Introduction ......................................... Protecting the environment ................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... Operator's Manual ................................. Service and vehicle operation ................ Operating safety .................................... QR codes for the rescue card ................ Data stored in the vehicle ...................... Information on copyright ....................... 26 26 26 27 27 29 31 31 33 At a glance ........................................... Cockpit .................................................. Instrument cluster ................................. Multifunction steering wheel ................. Center console ...................................... Overhead control panel ......................... Door control panel ................................. 34 34 35 36 37 40 41 Driving and parking .......................... Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... Driving ................................................. DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... Automatic transmission ....................... Refueling ............................................. Parking ................................................ Driving tips .......................................... Driving systems ................................... Safety ................................................... Panic alarm ............................................ Occupant safety .................................... Children in the vehicle ........................... Pets in the vehicle ................................. Driving safety systems ........................... Protection against theft ......................... 42 42 42 58 62 62 73 On-board computer and displays .... Important safety notes ........................ Displays and operation ........................ Menus and submenus ......................... Display messages ................................ Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................... 193 193 193 197 211 Opening and closing ........................... SmartKey ............................................... Doors ..................................................... Trunk ..................................................... Side windows ......................................... Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ...................................................... 75 75 81 82 87 Multimedia system ........................... General notes ...................................... Important safety notes ........................ Function restrictions ............................ Operating system ................................ 251 251 251 251 252 90 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95 Correct driver's seat position ................ 95 Seats ..................................................... 95 Steering wheel ..................................... 101 117 122 240 Stowage and features ...................... 261 Stowage areas ..................................... 261 Features .............................................. 267 Contents Maintenance and care ...................... Engine compartment ........................... ASSYST PLUS ...................................... Care ..................................................... 281 281 285 286 Breakdown assistance ..................... Where will I find...? .............................. Flat tire ................................................ Battery (vehicle) .................................. Jump-starting ....................................... Towing and tow-starting ...................... Fuses ................................................... 294 294 295 300 302 305 308 Wheels and tires ............................... Important safety notes ........................ Operation ............................................ Winter operation .................................. Tire pressure ....................................... Loading the vehicle .............................. All about wheels and tires ................... Changing a wheel ................................ Wheel-tire combination ........................ 310 310 310 312 313 320 323 330 335 Technical data ................................... Information regarding technical data ... Vehicle electronics .............................. Identification plates ............................. Service products and filling capacities ...................................................... Vehicle data ......................................... 337 337 337 338 339 344 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) 360° camera Cleaning ......................................... Display in the multimedia system .. Function/notes ............................. 167 290 180 178 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 213 Function/notes ................................ 63 Warning lamp ................................. 242 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 57 Activating media mode General notes ................................ 259 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 118 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 205 Display message ............................ 230 Function/notes ............................. 187 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 206 Display message ............................ 230 Function/information .................... 190 Active Parking Assist Canceling ....................................... 174 Detecting parking spaces .............. 171 Display message ............................ 230 Exiting a parking space .................. 173 Function/notes ............................. 170 Important safety notes .................. 170 Parking .......................................... 172 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 71 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 67 Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 166 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 166 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 225 Function/notes ............................. 109 Switching on/off ........................... 110 Additional speedometer ................... 208 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 342 Address book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Adjusting the volume Multimedia system ........................ 252 Air bags Deployment ..................................... 54 Display message ............................ 222 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 49 Important safety notes .................... 47 Introduction ..................................... 47 Knee bag .......................................... 49 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 50 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 43 Side impact air bag .......................... 49 Window curtain air bag .................... 50 Air vents Important safety notes .................. 122 Rear ............................................... 123 Setting ........................................... 122 Setting the center air vents ........... 123 Setting the side air vents ............... 123 Air-conditioning system see Climate control AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 229 Function/notes ............................. 165 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 74 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 74 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Index AMG Adaptive sport suspension system ................................................ 166 Performance Seat ............................ 99 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 208 AMG Performance exhaust system can be selected ................................. 131 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Armrest Stowage compartment .................. 262 Ashtray ............................................... 268 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 204 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 204 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 285 Driving abroad ............................... 286 Hiding a service message .............. 285 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 286 Service message ............................ 285 Special service requirements ......... 286 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 74 Function ........................................... 74 Switching off the alarm .................... 74 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 206 Display message ............................ 229 Function/notes ............................. 182 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 224 see Lights Automatic car wash (care) ............... 286 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 130 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 129 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 107 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. Changing gear ............................... DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... Display message ............................ Double-clutch function .................. Drive program ................................ Drive program display .................... Driving tips .................................... DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. Emergency running mode .............. Engaging drive position .................. Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position automatically ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Gliding mode ................................. Kickdown ....................................... Manual shifting .............................. Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) ......................................... Overview ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Pulling away ................................... Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency mode ....................................... 137 137 135 236 137 138 136 137 133 142 136 135 135 135 135 138 138 140 208 208 134 142 128 127 140 136 137 142 B Back button ....................................... 252 Backup lamp Display message ............................ 224 Bag hook ............................................ 265 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist PLUS with CrossTraffic Assist) Function/notes ................................ 63 Important safety notes .................... 64 5 6 Index Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 78 Important safety notes .................... 77 Replacing ......................................... 78 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 302 Display message ............................ 226 Important safety notes .................. 300 Jump starting ................................. 302 Belt see Seat belts Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 205 Display message ............................ 230 Notes/function .............................. 184 see Active Blind Spot Assist Blootooth® Connecting a different mobile phone ............................................ 259 Bluetooth® Searching for a mobile phone ........ 258 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Telephony ...................................... 258 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 218 Notes ............................................. 342 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brakes ABS .................................................. 63 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 67 BAS .................................................. 63 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 63 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 342 Display message ............................ 213 EBD .................................................. 71 High-performance brake system .... 152 Hill start assist ............................... 129 HOLD function ............................... 163 Important safety notes .................. 150 Maintenance .................................. 151 Parking brake ................................ 146 Riding tips ...................................... 150 Warning lamp ................................. 241 Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 294 see Flat tire see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 34 Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 194 C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 27 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Calling up the climate control bar Multimedia system ........................ 255 Calling up the climate control menu Multimedia system ........................ 256 Camera see 360° camera see Rear view camera Car see Vehicle Care 360° camera ................................. 290 Car wash ........................................ 286 Carpets .......................................... 293 Display ........................................... 291 Exhaust pipe .................................. 291 Exterior lights ................................ 290 General notes ................................ 286 Interior ........................................... 291 Matte finish ................................... 289 Paint .............................................. 288 Plastic trim .................................... 291 Power washer ................................ 288 Rear view camera .......................... 290 Roof lining ...................................... 293 Seat belt ........................................ 293 Seat cover ..................................... 292 Selector lever ................................ 292 Sensors ......................................... 290 Steering wheel ............................... 292 Index Trim pieces .................................... 292 Washing by hand ........................... 287 Wheels ........................................... 289 Windows ........................................ 289 Wiper blades .................................. 290 Wooden trim .................................. 292 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 265 CD see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 202 Center console Lower section .................................. 38 Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 39 Upper section .................................. 37 Central locking Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 75 Changing the media source ............. 201 Charge-air pressure (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 208 Charge-air pressure (on-board computer, Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) ..................................... 208 Child Restraint system .............................. 59 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 62 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 60 On the front-passenger seat ............ 61 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 61 Top Tether ....................................... 60 Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 58 Cigarette lighter ................................ 269 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 290 Climate control Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control ..................... 116 Controlling automatically ............... 118 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 118 Cooling with air dehumidification (multimedia system) ...................... 256 Defrosting the windows ................. 120 Defrosting the windshield .............. 119 ECO start/stop function ................ 117 General notes ................................ 116 Indicator lamp ................................ 118 Ionization ....................................... 122 Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 256 Notes on using the automatic climate control .................................. 117 Overview ........................................ 255 Overview of systems ...................... 116 Perfume atomizer .......................... 121 Perfume atomizer (multimedia system) .......................................... 256 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 120 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 118 Refrigerant ..................................... 343 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 344 Setting the air distribution ............. 119 Setting the air vents ...................... 122 Setting the airflow ......................... 119 Setting the climate mode (multimedia system) ............................... 256 Setting the temperature ................ 118 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 120 Switching on/off ........................... 117 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 120 Switching the synchronization function on and off ........................ 119 Synchronization function (multimedia system) ............................... 256 Climate control settings Multimedia system ........................ 255 Climate control system Climate control .............................. 117 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 34 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Activating/deactivating ................. 205 Display message ............................ 218 Operation/notes .............................. 65 COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 291 Combination switch .......................... 108 7 8 Index Connecting a USB device see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 198 Controller ........................................... 252 Controlling speed see DISTRONIC PLUS Convenience closing feature .............. 89 Convenience opening feature ............ 88 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 284 Display message ............................ 225 Filling capacity ............................... 343 Important safety notes .................. 342 Temperature display in the instrument cluster .................................. 194 Warning lamp ................................. 246 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 33 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 224 Function/notes ............................. 109 Crosswind Assist ................................. 71 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 154 Deactivating ................................... 155 Display message ............................ 233 Driving system ............................... 153 Function/notes ............................. 153 General notes ................................ 153 Important safety notes .................. 153 Setting a speed .............................. 154 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 154 Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed .......... 154 Cup holder Center console .............................. 268 Important safety notes .................. 267 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 30 Customer Relations Department ....... 30 D Data see Technical data Data carrier Selecting ........................................ 202 Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 224 Function/notes ............................. 107 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 207 Deactivating/activating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (on-board computer, except for Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) ......................................... 204 Declarations of conformity ................. 29 Diagnostics connection ...................... 30 Digital Operator's Manual Help ................................................. 25 Introduction ..................................... 25 Digital speedometer ......................... 199 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 135 Display see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 285 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 212 Driving systems ............................. 229 Engine ............................................ 225 General notes ................................ 211 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 212 Introduction ................................... 211 Lights ............................................. 224 Safety systems .............................. 213 SmartKey ....................................... 238 Tires ............................................... 234 Vehicle ........................................... 236 Distance recorder ............................. 197 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 248 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 66 Distance warning system see COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Index DISTRONIC PLUS Activating ....................................... 157 Activation conditions ..................... 157 Cruise control lever ....................... 157 Deactivating ................................... 160 Display message ............................ 231 Displays in the instrument cluster .. 159 Driving tips .................................... 161 Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 158 Function/notes ............................. 155 Important safety notes .................. 156 Setting a speed .............................. 159 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 159 Stopping ........................................ 158 with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............................................... 161 Doors Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 75 Control panel ................................... 41 Display message ............................ 238 Emergency locking ........................... 82 Emergency unlocking ....................... 82 Important safety notes .................... 81 Opening (from inside) ...................... 81 Drinking and driving ......................... 149 Drive program Automatic transmission ................. 138 Drive programs Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 136 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 133 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 286 Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 187 Driving on flooded roads .................. 152 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 63 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 71 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 67 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 63 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 63 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 65 Distance warning function ......... 65, 66 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 71 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 67 Important safety information ........... 62 Overview .......................................... 62 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 71 STEER CONTROL ............................. 73 Driving system RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ........................................ 164 Driving systems 360°camera .................................. 178 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 187 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 190 Active Parking Assist ..................... 170 AIRMATIC ...................................... 165 AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... 166 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 182 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 184 Cruise control ................................ 153 Display message ............................ 229 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 155 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 161 Driving Assistance Plus package ... 187 HOLD function ............................... 163 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 186 Lane Tracking package .................. 184 PARKTRONIC ................................. 167 Rear view camera .......................... 174 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 183 Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 152 Automatic transmission ................. 137 Brakes ........................................... 150 Break-in period .............................. 124 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 161 Downhill gradient ........................... 150 Drinking and driving ....................... 149 Driving in winter ............................. 153 Driving on flooded roads ................ 152 Driving on wet roads ...................... 152 Exhaust check ............................... 149 Fuel ................................................ 148 General .......................................... 148 9 10 Index Hydroplaning ................................. Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... Snow chains .................................. Subjecting brakes to a load ........... The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Automatic transmission ................. Climate control (dual-zone automatic climate control) .................... 152 153 151 313 151 124 151 202 251 133 117 E EASY-ENTRY feature Function/notes ............................. 101 EASY-ENTRY system ............................ 98 EASY-EXIT feature Function/notes ............................. 101 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 215 Function/notes ................................ 71 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 149 On-board computer ....................... 198 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 130 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 129 Deactivating/activating ................. 130 General information ....................... 129 Important safety notes .................. 129 Introduction ................................... 129 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 57 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 82 Trunk ............................................... 87 Vehicle ............................................. 82 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 54 Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 27 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 245 Display message ............................ 225 ECO start/stop function ................ 129 Engine number ............................... 339 Irregular running ............................ 131 Jump-starting ................................. 302 Starting (important safety notes) ... 127 Starting problems .......................... 131 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 127 Starting via smartphone ................ 128 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 127 Switching off .................................. 146 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 308 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 131 Engine oil Adding ........................................... 283 Additives ........................................ 342 Checking the oil level ..................... 282 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 283 Display message ............................ 227 Filling capacity ............................... 342 General notes ................................ 341 Notes about oil grades ................... 341 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 282 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208 temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) ......................................... 208 Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating (Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) ........................................... 69 Index Activating/deactivating (notes, except Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) .................................. 68 AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 209 Characteristics ................................. 68 Crosswind Assist ............................. 71 Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 69 Deactivating/activating (notes, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...... 68 Deactivating/activating (onboard computer, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 204 Display message ............................ 213 Function/notes ................................ 67 General notes .................................. 67 Important safety information ........... 68 Trailer stabilization ........................... 70 Warning lamp ................................. 242 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 68 Exhaust see Exhaust pipe Exhaust check ................................... 149 Exhaust pipe Cleaning ......................................... 291 Exterior lighting Cleaning ......................................... 290 Setting options .............................. 107 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 103 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 103 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104 Setting ........................................... 103 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 106 Storing the parking position .......... 104 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 262 F Favorites Overview ........................................ 254 Features ............................................. 267 Filler cap see Refueling Flat tire Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... 330 MOExtended tires .......................... 296 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 295 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 297 Floormats ........................................... 280 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 337 Two-way radio ................................ 337 Front wheel arch cover Installing/removing ....................... 112 Fuel Additives ........................................ 341 Consumption statistics .................. 198 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 198 Displaying the range ...................... 198 Driving tips .................................... 148 Fuel gauge ....................................... 35 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 340 Important safety notes .................. 340 Problem (malfunction) ................... 145 Refueling ........................................ 143 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 340 Fuel filler flap Closing ........................................... 144 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 198 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 340 Problem (malfunction) ................... 145 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 309 Before changing ............................. 308 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 308 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 309 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 308 Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 309 Important safety notes .................. 308 11 12 Index G G-Meter (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 209 G-Meter (on-board computer, Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) .............................................. 209 Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 280 General notes ................................ 277 Important safety notes .................. 277 Opening/closing the garage door .. 279 Problems when programming ........ 279 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 277 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 278 Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 208 Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) .............................................. 208 Genuine parts ...................................... 26 Glove box ........................................... 262 Google™ Local Search see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 H Handbrake see Parking brake HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 85 Handwriting recognition Switching text reader function on/off ............................................ 254 Touchpad ....................................... 253 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 109 Head restraints Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 98 Adjusting the fore-and-aft position manually ................................... 97 General notes .................................. 97 Important safety notes .................... 97 Installing/removing (rear) ................ 98 Head-up display Adjusting the brightness ................ 207 Displays and operating .................. 196 Function/notes ............................. 196 Important safety notes .................. 196 Selecting displays .......................... 206 Setting the position ....................... 207 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 106 Headlamps Fogging up ..................................... 110 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High beam flasher ............................. 108 High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 109 Display message ............................ 224 Replacing bulbs ............................. 112 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Hill start assist .................................. 129 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 163 Activation conditions ..................... 163 Deactivating ................................... 164 Display message ............................ 231 Function/notes ............................. 163 General notes ................................ 163 Home address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Hood Closing ........................................... 282 Display message ............................ 237 Important safety notes .................. 281 Opening ......................................... 281 Horn ...................................................... 34 HUD see Head-up display Hydroplaning ..................................... 152 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 73 Indicator and warning lamps COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 248 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Index Indicators see Turn signals Insect protection on the radiator .... 282 Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 35 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 35 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 193 Interior lighting Automatic control .......................... 111 Control ........................................... 111 Overview ........................................ 110 Reading lamp ................................. 110 iPod® see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 J Jack Using ............................................. 331 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 302 K Key positions SmartKey ....................................... 125 Start/Stop button .......................... 125 KEYLESS-GO Activating ......................................... 76 Convenience closing feature ............ 89 Deactivation ..................................... 76 Locking ............................................ 76 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 126 Start function ................................... 77 Unlocking ......................................... 76 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 138 Manual gearshifting ....................... 142 Knee bag .............................................. 49 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 187 Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 206 Display message ............................ 230 Function/information .................... 186 see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Tracking package ..................... 184 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 210 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 60 License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... 224 Light function, active Display message ............................ 224 Light sensor (display message) ....... 224 Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 109 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 107 Cornering light function ................. 109 Fogged up headlamps .................... 110 General notes ................................ 107 Hazard warning lamps ................... 109 High beam flasher .......................... 108 High-beam headlamps ................... 108 Light switch ................................... 107 Low-beam headlamps .................... 108 Parking lamps ................................ 108 Rear fog lamp ................................ 108 Setting exterior lighting ................. 107 Standing lamps .............................. 108 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 207 Turn signals ................................... 108 see Interior lighting Loading guidelines ............................ 261 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 82 Emergency locking ........................... 82 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 81 Locking centrally see Central locking Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 224 Replacing bulbs ............................. 112 Switching on/off ........................... 108 13 14 Index Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 99 M M+S tires ............................................ 312 Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 289 mbrace Call priority .................................... 273 Display message ............................ 218 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 273 Downloading routes ....................... 276 Emergency call .............................. 271 General notes ................................ 270 Geo fencing ................................... 277 Info call button .............................. 273 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 275 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 275 Remote vehicle locking .................. 275 Roadside Assistance button .......... 272 Search & Send ............................... 274 Self-test ......................................... 270 Speed alert .................................... 276 System .......................................... 270 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 277 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 275 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 77 General notes .................................. 77 Inserting .......................................... 77 Locking vehicle ................................ 82 Removing ......................................... 77 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 82 Media Interface see Digital Operator's Manual Memory card (audio) ......................... 202 Memory function Seats, steering wheel, exterior mirrors ........................................... 105 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360°camera .................................. 178 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 187 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 190 Active Parking Assist ..................... 170 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 182 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 184 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 155 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 161 General notes ................................ 153 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 186 PARKTRONIC ................................. 167 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 56 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 57 Rear view camera .......................... 174 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 183 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 212 Messages see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 290 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 258 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 259 Frequencies ................................... 337 Installation ..................................... 337 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 203 Transmission output (maximum) .... 337 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 77 MOExtended tires .............................. 296 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 335 Mounting a new wheel ................... 334 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 331 Raising the vehicle ......................... 331 Removing a wheel .......................... 334 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 331 MP3 Operation ....................................... 202 Index see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 195 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 194 Overview .......................................... 36 Multimedia system Switching on and off ...................... 252 Music files see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 199 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 124 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ....................................... Faults ............................................... Operation ......................................... System self-test ............................... Occupant safety Air bags ........................................... Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. Children in the vehicle ..................... Important safety notes .................... Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... Pets in the vehicle ........................... PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. Restraint system warning lamp ........ 50 54 51 53 47 57 58 42 42 50 43 62 56 57 43 Seat belt .......................................... 43 OCS Conditions ....................................... 50 Faults ............................................... 54 Operation ......................................... 51 System self-test ............................... 53 Odometer ........................................... 197 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 208 Assistance graphic menu ............... 204 Assistance menu ........................... 204 Display messages .......................... 211 Displaying a service message ........ 285 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 160 Factory settings ............................. 208 G-Meter ......................................... 209 Head-up display ............................. 196 Important safety notes .................. 193 Instrument cluster menu ............... 207 Lights menu ................................... 207 Media menu ................................... 201 Menu overview .............................. 197 Message memory .......................... 212 Navigation menu ............................ 199 Operation ....................................... 194 RACETIMER ................................... 210 Radio menu ................................... 201 Service menu ................................. 204 Settings menu ............................... 204 Standard display ............................ 197 Telephone menu ............................ 203 Trip menu ...................................... 197 Video DVD operation ..................... 202 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 29 Important safety notes .................... 29 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 25 Operator's Manual Overview .......................................... 27 Vehicle equipment ........................... 27 Outside temperature display ........... 194 Overhead control panel ...................... 40 15 16 Index P Paddle shifters see Steering wheel paddle shifters Paint code number ............................ 338 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 288 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Important safety notes .................... 90 Operating ......................................... 91 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94 Rain closing feature ......................... 92 Reversing feature ............................. 91 Panoramic roof Operating the roller sunblinds .......... 92 Parcel net ........................................... 266 Parking Important safety notes .................. 145 Parking brake ................................ 146 Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side ................................................ 104 Rear view camera .......................... 174 Switching off the engine ................ 146 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid see 360° camera see Active Parking Assist see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Applying automatically ................... 147 Applying or releasing manually ...... 147 Display message ............................ 215 Electric parking brake .................... 146 Emergency braking ........................ 148 General notes ................................ 146 Releasing automatically ................. 147 Warning lamp ................................. 245 Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 108 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 169 Driving system ............................... 167 Function/notes ............................. 167 Important safety notes .................. 167 Problem (malfunction) ................... 170 Range of the sensors ..................... 168 Warning display ............................. 169 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 222 Indicator lamps ................................ 43 Problems (malfunction) .................. 222 Perfume atomizer Operating ....................................... 121 Problem (malfunction) ................... 122 Setting the perfume intensity (multimedia system) ...................... 256 Vial ................................................ 121 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 62 Phone book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 291 Power washers .................................. 288 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Display message ............................ 219 Operation ......................................... 56 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 205 Display message ............................ 219 Function/notes ................................ 71 Important safety notes .................... 72 Warning lamp ................................. 248 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Operation ......................................... 57 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74 Immobilizer ...................................... 73 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 26 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 128 General notes ................................ 128 Hill start assist ............................... 129 Index Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 31 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 30 Quick access for audio and telephone Changing the station/music track .............................................. 254 R RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 164 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 210 Radiator cover ................................... 282 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 201 Radio mode see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 29 Rain closing feature (panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 92 Reading lamp ..................................... 110 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 123 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 224 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 263 Rear seats Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 263 Rear view camera "Reverse parking" function ............ 176 Cleaning instructions ..................... 290 Display in the multimedia system .. 175 General notes ................................ 174 Object detection (function/ notes) ............................................ 178 Switching on/off ........................... 175 Wide-angle function ....................... 178 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 120 Switching on/off ........................... 120 Rear-view mirror Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104 Recuperation display ........................ 198 Reflective safety jacket .................... 294 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 343 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 35 Important safety notes .................. 143 Refueling process .......................... 143 see Fuel Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 277 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 277 Replacing bulbs High-beam headlamps ................... 112 Important safety notes .................. 111 Installing/removing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 112 Low-beam headlamps .................... 112 Overview of bulb types .................. 111 Turn signals (front) ......................... 112 Reporting safety defects .................... 30 Rescue card ......................................... 31 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 228 Warning lamp ................................. 245 Restraint system Display message ............................ 220 Introduction ..................................... 42 Warning lamp ................................. 245 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 91 Roller sunblinds ............................... 92 Side windows ................................... 87 Sliding sunroof ................................. 91 Trunk lid ........................................... 83 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 28 17 18 Index Roller sunblind Operating ......................................... 93 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel ..................................... 92 Resetting ......................................... 93 Roof carrier ........................................ 266 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 293 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 344 Route guidance see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 58 see Occupant safety see Operating safety Safety system see Driving safety systems SD card Inserting/removing ........................ 260 SD memory card see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Selecting ........................................ 202 Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 47 Cleaning ......................................... 293 Correct usage .................................. 45 Fastening ......................................... 46 Important safety guidelines ............. 44 Introduction ..................................... 43 Releasing ......................................... 47 Warning lamp ................................. 240 Warning lamp (function) ................... 47 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 97 Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 99 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 99 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 97 Calling up a stored setting (memory function) .................................. 106 Cleaning the cover ......................... 292 Correct driver's seat position ........... 95 Folding the backrests forward/ back ................................................. 98 Important safety notes .................... 95 Seat backrest display message ..... 238 Seat heating .................................. 100 Seat heating problem .................... 101 Seat ventilation .............................. 100 Seat ventilation problem ................ 101 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 106 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 100 Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 100 Securing a load see Securing cargo Securing cargo .................................. 265 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 292 see Automatic transmission Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 290 Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 204 Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 342 Coolant (engine) ............................ 342 Engine oil ....................................... 341 Fuel ................................................ 339 Important safety notes .................. 339 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 343 Washer fluid ................................... 343 Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 208 On-board computer ....................... 204 Index SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 209 Side impact air bag ............................. 49 Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 224 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 289 Convenience closing feature ............ 89 Convenience opening feature .......... 88 Important safety information ........... 87 Opening/closing .............................. 88 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90 Resetting ......................................... 89 Reversing feature ............................. 87 SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Sliding sunroof Important safety notes .................... 90 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94 see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 78 Changing the programming ............. 77 Checking the battery ....................... 78 Convenience closing feature ............ 89 Convenience opening feature .......... 88 Display message ............................ 238 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 75 Important safety notes .................... 75 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 77 Loss ................................................. 79 Mechanical key ................................ 77 Overview .......................................... 75 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 125 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79 Starting the engine ........................ 127 Smartphone Starting the engine ........................ 128 SMS see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Snow chains ...................................... 313 Socket (12 V) Center console .............................. 270 General notes ................................ 269 Rear compartment ......................... 270 Sound Switching on/off ........................... 252 Special seat belt retractor .................. 58 Specialist workshop ............................ 30 Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 208 Digital ............................................ 199 In the Instrument cluster ................. 35 Segments ...................................... 193 Selecting the display unit ............... 207 SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) ........................................... 69 Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 69 Warning lamp ................................. 244 Standing lamps Display message ............................ 224 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Start/Stop button Key positions ................................. 125 Starting the engine ........................ 127 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 127 STEER CONTROL .................................. 73 Steering Display message ............................ 238 Warning lamps ............................... 250 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS) Display message ............................ 233 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101 Button overview ............................... 36 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 194 Cleaning ......................................... 292 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 101 Important safety notes .................. 101 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 106 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 140 19 20 Index Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... Stowage areas ................................... Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. Center console .............................. Cup holders ................................... Door ............................................... Eyeglasses compartment ............... Glove box ....................................... Important safety information ......... Map pockets .................................. Stowage net ................................... see Stowage areas Stowage net ....................................... Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... Summer tires In winter ........................................ Sun visor ............................................ Suspension setting AIRMATIC ...................................... AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. Switching on media mode Via the device list .......................... 210 261 262 262 267 263 262 262 261 263 263 263 266 312 268 166 166 120 259 T Tachometer ........................................ 194 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 224 Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 35 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 339 Information .................................... 337 Tires/wheels ................................. 335 Vehicle data ................................... 344 Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 203 Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... 258 Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ 258 Display message ............................ 238 Introduction ................................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ Number from the phone book ........ Redialing ........................................ Rejecting/ending a call ................. see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Switching between mobile phones ........................................... see Mobile phone Temperature Coolant (display in the instrument cluster) .......................................... Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... of engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) ......................................... of transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) ......................................... Outside temperature ...................... Setting (climate control) ................ Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... Through-loading feature ................... Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Checking manually ........................ Display message ............................ Maximum ....................................... Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Notes ............................................. Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. 203 203 203 204 203 251 259 194 208 208 208 194 118 208 263 210 317 316 234 316 298 315 299 313 297 316 316 317 319 317 317 318 Index Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... TIREFIT kit Important safety notes .................. Storage location ............................ Tire pressure not reached .............. Tire pressure reached .................... Using ............................................. Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... Bar (definition) ............................... Changing a wheel .......................... Characteristics .............................. Checking ........................................ Curb weight (definition) ................. Definition of terms ......................... Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Information on driving .................... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... 320 319 249 319 297 295 298 299 297 329 328 328 330 328 311 329 328 330 234 330 328 327 328 329 329 310 328 310 329 325 330 327 329 329 329 Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. 329 Maximum tire load ......................... 327 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 329 MOExtended tires .......................... 312 Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ 330 PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... 329 Replacing ....................................... 330 Service life ..................................... 311 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 329 Snow chains .................................. 313 Speed rating (definition) ................ 329 Storing ........................................... 331 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 328 Summer tires in winter .................. 312 Temperature .................................. 324 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 330 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 329 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 329 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 328 Tire size (data) ............................... 335 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 325 Tire tread ....................................... 311 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 329 Total load limit (definition) ............. 330 Traction ......................................... 324 Traction (definition) ....................... 330 Tread wear ..................................... 324 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 323 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 328 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 330 Wheel and tire combination ........... 335 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 328 see Flat tire Top Tether ............................................ 60 Touchpad Changing the station/music track .............................................. 254 Character suggestions ................... 253 Deleting characters ....................... 253 Entering a space ............................ 253 21 22 Index Entering characters ....................... 253 Gesture control .............................. 253 Handwriting recognition ................ 253 Operating the touchpad ................. 253 Overview ........................................ 253 Quick access for Audio .................. 254 Switching ....................................... 253 Switching input line ....................... 253 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 308 Important safety notes .................. 305 Towing a trailer ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 70 Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 305 Installing the towing eye ................ 306 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 307 Removing the towing eye ............... 306 Transporting the vehicle ................ 307 With both axles on the ground ....... 307 With the rear axle raised ................ 306 Towing eye ......................................... 295 Traffic reports see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Traffic Sign Assist Display message ............................ 231 Function/notes ............................. 183 Important safety notes .................. 183 Instrument cluster display ............. 183 Transfer case ..................................... 142 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 136 Transporting the vehicle .................. 307 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 292 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 198 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 197 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 199 Trunk Important safety notes .................... 82 Locking separately ........................... 86 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 86 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 84 Opening/closing (from outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 85 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 83 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 237 Obstacle recognition ........................ 83 Opening dimensions ...................... 344 Opening/closing .............................. 82 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 344 Turn signals Display message ............................ 224 Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 112 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 337 Installation ..................................... 337 Transmission output (maximum) .... 337 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 82 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 81 USB devices Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 260 V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 268 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 30 Data acquisition ............................... 31 Display message ............................ 236 Equipment ....................................... 27 Individual settings .......................... 204 Limited Warranty ............................. 31 Loading .......................................... 320 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 82 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 75 Lowering ........................................ 335 Index Maintenance .................................... 28 Operating safety .............................. 29 Parking .......................................... 145 Parking for a long period ................ 148 Pulling away ................................... 128 Raising ........................................... 331 Reporting problems ......................... 30 Securing from rolling away ............ 331 Technical data ............................... 337 Towing away .................................. 305 Transporting .................................. 307 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 82 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 75 Vehicle data ................................... 344 Vehicle data Roof load (maximum) ..................... 344 Trunk load (maximum) ................... 344 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 344 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 82 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 338 Vehicle level AIRMATIC ...................................... 165 Display message ............................ 229 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 295 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 202 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 VIN Seat ............................................... 339 Type plate ...................................... 338 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 242 Brakes ........................................... 241 Check Engine ................................. 245 Coolant .......................................... 246 Distance warning ........................... 248 ESP® .............................................. 242 ESP® OFF ....................................... 244 Fuel tank ........................................ 245 General notes ................................ 240 Overview .......................................... 35 Parking brake ................................ 245 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 43 Reserve fuel ................................... 245 Restraint system ............................ 245 Seat belt ........................................ 240 SPORT handling mode ................... 244 Steering ......................................... 250 Tire pressure monitor .................... 249 Warranty .............................................. 27 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 238 Weather display (COMAND) see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 251 Wheel and tire combinations Tires ............................................... 335 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 335 Wheel chock ...................................... 331 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 330 Checking ........................................ 311 Cleaning ......................................... 289 Important safety notes .................. 310 Information on driving .................... 310 Interchanging/changing ................ 330 Mounting a new wheel ................... 334 Mounting a wheel .......................... 331 Removing a wheel .......................... 334 Snow chains .................................. 313 Storing ........................................... 331 Tightening torque ........................... 335 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 335 Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 221 Operation ......................................... 50 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 119 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 285 Important safety notes .................. 343 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 115 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 113 Switching on/off ........................... 113 23 24 Index Winter driving Important safety notes .................. Slippery road surfaces ................... Snow chains .................................. Winter operation Radiator cover ............................... Summer tires ................................. Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 312 153 313 282 312 312 290 113 113 292 Digital Operator's Manual Introduction The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia system. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. Operation Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Press the Ø button on the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears. X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. X Confirm 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual appears. X Operating the Digital Operator's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 252). Content pages The content pages can be accessed by means of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents. To scroll forward/backward: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X To select information text or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select the % symbol ?. X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Operator's Manual remains open in the background. X 25 26 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Introduction Protecting the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Ralways Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant Service and vehicle operation Service and vehicle operation Warranty Operator's Manual The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and Warranty i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safetyrelevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you. Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause Z Introduction systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 338). 27 Introduction 28 Service and vehicle operation death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair. (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its repair. (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you when taking the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service advisor will enter every service into your Maintenance Booklet on your behalf. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100(Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty Booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: RService facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter. RThe fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bumps or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the two following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Z Introduction Operating safety 29 30 Operating safety Introduction Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtechnical data for the vehicle Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: Data stored in the vehicle Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. QR codes for the rescue card The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data stored in the vehicle Data storage A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Rincidents Rmalfunctions In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunctions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimize vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. Z Introduction The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov 31 Introduction 32 Data stored in the vehicle After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual or the Digital Owners Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: RHow various systems in your vehicle were operating RWhether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. RHow Information on copyright 33 Information on copyright Introduction General information Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Z 34 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel paddle shifters 140 ; Combination switch 108 = Horn ? Instrument cluster A DIRECT SELECT lever 135 B Climate control systems 116 C Overhead control panel 40 D Control panel for multimedia system and vehicle functions 37 E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 125 125 F Adjusts the steering wheel 101 G Cruise control lever 154 35 Function Page H Electric parking brake I Diagnostics connection J Opens the hood 281 K Light switch 107 L Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist Deactivating PARKTRONIC Switching on the 360° camera Switching on the Head-up Display Vehicles without a driver assistance system: map/ coin holder 146 30 161 190 167 178 196 Instrument cluster 35 At a glance Instrument cluster Function : Page Speedometer with segments Warning and indicator lamps: å ESP® OFF ÷ ESP® · Distance warning Ð Power steering 6 Restraint system ü Seat belts K High-beam headlamps L Low-beam headlamps T Parking lamps R Rear fog lamp h Tire pressure monitor 193 ; #! Turn signals 108 = Multifunction display 195 ? Tachometer Warning and indicator lamps: ! Electric parking brake (yellow) ! ABS 194 242 242 248 250 43 240 108 108 108 108 249 245 242 i Information on the display of the outside temperature in the multifunction display can A B Function ; Check Engine % This indicator lamp has no function Electric parking brake (red) F USA only ! Canada only Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only M SPORT handling mode (Mercedes-AMG and Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) Page 245 Coolant temperature gauge Warning and indicator lamps: ? Coolant 194 Fuel level indicator Warning and indicator lamps: 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator (right-hand side) 245 241 244 246 245 be found under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 194). 36 Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Multimedia system display = ~ Rejects or ends a call 6 Makes or accepts a call Further telephone functions W X Adjusts volume 8 Mute ó Switches on voiceoperated control navigation or the Voice Control System 195 ? 203 i Vehicles with an Audio 20 multimedia system: you can find further information Ron Function Page the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron voice-operated control for navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions ò Opens the menu list 9 : Selects a menu a Confirms the selection % Back Operates the on-board computer ñ Switches off voiceoperated control navigation or the Voice Control System Page 194 i Vehicles with a COMAND multimedia system: you can find further information Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions Center console 37 Center console At a glance Center console, upper section Function Function Page : Climate control systems 116 B Analog clock ; £ Hazard warning lamps 109 C = Ø Vehicle functions/ system settings button; see Digital Operator's Manual Õ Media button; see Digital Operator's Manual D $ Radio button; see Digital Operator's Manual ? % Telephone button; see Digital Operator's Manual E Ø Navigation button; see Digital Operator's Manual A PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps ATA indicator lamp F þ Inserts or ejects a CD or DVD; see Digital Operator's Manual 43 74 Page 38 Center console At a glance Center console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Function : Function Page Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket Cup holder 261 268 269 269 267 ; Adjusts the volume 252 = Ü Switches the multimedia system on/off 252 ? Moves the seat-belt extender forwards 46 A Touchpad 253 Page B Stowage compartment with Media Interface 261 C è ECO start/stop function 129 D É Sets the vehicle level 165 E DYNAMIC SELECT switch 133 F % Back button 252 G Controller 252 H g Favorites button 254 Center console 39 At a glance Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Function : ; = Page Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket Cup holder 268 269 269 267 Adjusts the volume Vehicles with AMG Performance exhaust system: Ü Switches the multimedia system on/off 252 AMG Performance exhaust system can be selected Ü Switches the multimedia system on/off 252 131 252 ? è ECO start/stop function 129 A Touchpad 253 Function B Stowage compartment with Media Interface C å Activates/deactivates ESP® M Activates/deactivates SPORT handling mode Page 261 69 69 D Manual gearshifting (permanent setting) 140 E DYNAMIC SELECT switch (selects the drive program) 133 F % Back button 252 G Controller 252 H g Favorites button 254 40 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Function Page : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 110 ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 111 = G SOS button 271 ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 111 A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 111 B p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 110 C ï Info call button 273 D Eyeglasses compartment 262 E 3 Operates the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Operates the roller sunblinds Page 91 92 F Rear-view mirror Automatic anti-glare 104 G Buttons for the garage door opener 277 H Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions I F Breakdown assistance call button 272 Door control panel 41 At a glance Door control panel Function : Function Page r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering column 105 ; Adjusts the seats electrically 97 = c Seat heating 100 ? s Seat ventilation 100 A Opens the door 81 B % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle 81 Page C W Opens/closes the left side window 87 D 7Zª\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors out/in electrically 103 E W Opens/closes the right side window 87 F p Opens/closes the trunk lid 86 Occupant safety 42 Safety Panic alarm To activate: press and hold ! button : for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed. X To disarm: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO: X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. X Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: Rseat belt system Rair bags Rchild restraint system Rchild seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 45) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 95). As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 95). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 47). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 54). For information on children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 58). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify components of the restraint system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This can affect for example the Emergency Tensioning Device or the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 50) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 58). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 50). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 43) and "Air bags" (Y page 47). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle Z 43 Safety Occupant safety Safety 44 Occupant safety occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. G WARNING If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an acci- dent or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without an additional and suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint systems. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 58) in addition to the child restraint Occupant safety G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified. Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide the best level of protection. G WARNING If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Only use the standard three-point seat belt. Never modify the seat belt system. Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 261). Z Safety system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 50) 45 46 Occupant safety Fastening seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45). Safety G WARNING If the seat-belt extender is extended during the journey, the seat belt is not fitted properly on the body. The seat belt can then no longer perform its intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always make sure that the seat-belt extender is retracted during a journey. If the seat-belt extender does not retract automatically, you can return it manually. Press the seat-belt extender back to the stop before starting the vehicle to do so. Returning the seat-belt extender requires force. The seat-belt extender for the driver and front passenger helps you fasten your seat belt. Seatbelt extender = is extended when the respective door is closed. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press seat-belt extender button ?. Seat-belt extender = extends. Seat-belt extender = is retracted again if: X Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within 60 seconds In this case, you can extend seat-belt extender = again. Press seat-belt extender button ? again. Rthe respective door is opened Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it forwards Rthe front-passenger seat remains unoccupied If you then press seat-belt extender button ?, seat-belt extender = will not extend. Basic illustration Adjust the seat (Y page 95). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X You can also extend seat-belt extender = with seat-belt extender button ?. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 58). Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back. Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat-belt adjustment function using the multimedia system. Information on activating and deactivating the seat-belt adjustment function can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual or in the separate multimedia system operating instructions. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If the doors are closed and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. Air bags Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 54). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Z 47 Safety Occupant safety 48 Occupant safety To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Safety Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 43). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 50) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 58) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Occupant safety ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. Driver's knee bag : deploys underneath the steering column and front-passenger knee bag ; underneath the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupants in the front seats. Safety Front air bags Side impact air bags G WARNING Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 43). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 50). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 51) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Knee bags 49 Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. Z Safety 50 Occupant safety The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Window curtain air bags Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 54). Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Rthe Requirements To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Occupant Classification System operation (OCS) : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 222). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 54). Z 51 Safety Occupant safety 52 Occupant safety G WARNING Safety If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If OCS determines that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 58). When the occupant classification system (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the frontpassenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 51). If the front-passenger front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 54). Z 53 Safety Occupant safety 54 Occupant safety Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 53). Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorBAG OFF indicator lamp rect. lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person even though the fronton the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 50). passenger seat is occuX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpied by an adult or a perpassenger seat may not be used. son of a stature correX Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedessponding to that of an Benz Center. adult. The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning. BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child does not light up and/or seat. does not stay on. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, Runoccupied adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Roccupied with the weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended pro- Occupant safety It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. G WARNING Emergency Tensioning Devices that have deployed pyrotechnically are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 43) Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the respective front-passenger seat The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags as well as driver's and frontpassenger knee bags RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 43). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or Z Safety tection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. 55 Safety 56 Occupant safety acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. RSide impact air bags on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and in the rear compartment seats The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident: RFrontal collision RSide impact RRollover PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system) Introduction PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personal injuries occurring as a result of an accident cannot be eliminated. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Function Important safety notes PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package: when a driver assistance system intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. Rvehicles with the memory function for the front-passenger seat: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Information about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned about the intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up. When driving, or when parking or exiting a parking space with assistance from Active Parking Assist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes. PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS) Introduction PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Function PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rearend collision is imminent: - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary. - the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is canceled: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored. Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Z 57 Safety Occupant safety 58 Children in the vehicle Rthe front side windows are lowered with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call Safety Rvehicles G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 50) G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat. Rrelease Rshift Special seat belt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the front seat belt smoothly out of the seat-belt extender and the rear seat belt out of the belt outlet. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated. X Push the child seat restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. Removing a child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the release button of the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back to the seat-belt extender in the front and the belt outlet in the rear. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 261). G WARNING Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, Z 59 Safety Children in the vehicle 60 Children in the vehicle Safety before you install a child restraint system again. The securing systems of child restraint systems are: Rthe seat belt system Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 50). There you will also find information on deactivating the frontpassenger front air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems Children in the vehicle If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. Top Tether anchorages Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage =. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 97). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Top Tether anchorage points = are installed in the rear compartment behind the head restraints on the parcel shelf. X Move head restraint : upwards. X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 50). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the frontpassenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43) is the frontpassenger front air bag deactivated. Z Safety cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. 61 62 Driving safety systems Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Safety Forward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a forwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 63) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 63) RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist System PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist) (Y page 63) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 65) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 67) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 71) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 71) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 71) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 73) Important safety notes Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 310). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. Driving safety systems BAS (Brake Assist System) General information General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 242) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 213). Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. X Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist General information BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 62). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. Z Safety ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 63 Safety 64 Driving safety systems With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 64). Important safety notes G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify people, this is especially the case if they are moving. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor system detection range Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Ror if: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision At speeds of more than20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment. At speeds of above20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h). At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robstacles crossing your path, which move in the detection range of the sensors and are recognized by them i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak- ing force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 56). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou activate kickdown. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you. Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rthe vehicle is new or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the important safety notes in the "Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 124). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Z Safety Function 65 66 Driving safety systems Safety Activating/deactivating The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is automatically active after switching on the ignition. You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer (Y page 205). When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. Distance warning function General information The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 62). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive Rnot an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function. Function Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you are rapidly approaching a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4–65 mph (7–105 km/h) for moving objects R4–31 mph (7–50 km/h) for stationary objects Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4–124 mph (7–200 km/h) for moving objects R4–31 mph (7–50 km/h) for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking Function to intervene. Driving safety systems Adaptive Brake Assist General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 56). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 62). G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. Z Safety If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 56). 67 68 Driving safety systems ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Safety tion (Y page 62). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 306). If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 242) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 213). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was automatically switched off. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Driving safety systems i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the onboard computer (Y page 204). ESP®deactivated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. ESP®activated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RTraction control is still activated. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. REngine Deactivating/activating ESP® (Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 62). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® is activated. handling mode is activated. RESP® is deactivated. RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if Z Safety It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. 69 Driving safety systems 70 the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® REngine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated Safety If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RTraction control is still activated. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. REngine To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears on the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X X X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears on the multifunction display. To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON message appears on the multifunction display. Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. RTraction control is still activated. ESP® trailer stabilization General information ESP® trailer stabilization is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized. Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. Driving safety systems Crosswind Assist General information the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 242) as well as display messages (Y page 215). ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 163) and hill start assist (Y page 129). Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated in ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments. ESP® intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle. ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. General information Important safety notes i Pay attention to the important safety notes Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 62). PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 72). Z Safety If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. 71 72 Driving safety systems Safety Important safety notes G WARNING G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify people, especially if they are moving. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot intervene. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. Rto Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Ror if: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Protection against theft Function To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 205). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you are rapidly approaching a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. X PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat belts fastened Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h) At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle i If there is an increased risk of a collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 56). If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. Ractivating kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. Safety Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 73 STEER CONTROL General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. Rthe vehicle starts to skid. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 62). No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is deactivated is malfunctioning. Rthe lighting is faulty. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. RESP® Protection against theft Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. Z Protection against theft 74 i The immobilizer is always deactivated when Safety you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is stopped. X X or To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped. Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. X i If the alarm continues for more than To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately ten seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood X To stop the alarm with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is stopped. or 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends a message or establishes a data connection provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available. SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. A brief radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing Rrelease Rshifting SmartKey functions G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. : & Locks the vehicle ; F Opens/closes the trunk lid = % Unlocks the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Ranti-theft protection is reactivated. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the following components: Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated via the Z 75 Opening and closing SmartKey SmartKey 76 multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. You will receive visual and acoustic locking confirmation if all components were able to be locked. When the locator lighting is activated via the multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey; see the Digital Operator's Manual. To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold the F button until the trunk lid opens. X To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F button on the SmartKey. When the trunk lid closes you can then release the button. Opening and closing X KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle (Y page 127). Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A brief radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 89). X Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the key. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp (Y page 78) of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated. X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. SmartKey Mechanical key General notes General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle (Y page 127). If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 78) flashes twice. If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks Removing the mechanical key or Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the front-passenger door handle. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 78) flashes twice. X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. Further information on locking/unlocking the driver's door (Y page 82). Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key ; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. SmartKey battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in Z Opening and closing KEYLESS-GO start function 77 SmartKey 78 severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Opening and closing Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the battery X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 78). If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 77). X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X SmartKey Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey (Y page 77). X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it. Problems with the SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 78) and replace it if necessary the SmartKey. (Y page 78). If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 82). There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 82). X The SmartKey is faulty. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 82). X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76). KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 78) and replace it if necessary (Y page 78). If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 82). There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 82). X Z Opening and closing X 79 80 SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 82). X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Opening and closing X The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low. started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 302). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 302). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using the Start/ Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehicle. The vehicle is locked. Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. X The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 78) and replace it if necessary (Y page 78). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X You have lost a SmartKey. You have lost the mechanical key. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Doors X Important safety notes Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside. The switches are on the driver’s door. Opening and closing G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Rrelease Rshifting Unlocking and opening doors from the inside You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). 81 To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. When the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle is locked. Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. The doors can be opened from the inside. If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked. X X Z Trunk 82 Opening and closing Automatic locking feature Insert the mechanical key into opening : in the protective cap. X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. X Release the door handle. X To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. You can activate and deactivate the automatic locking mechanism via the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the mechanical key i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using the mechanical key, begin by pressing the locking button for the interior locking mechanism while the driver's door is open. Then lock the driver's door using the mechanical key. To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counterclockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 74). Trunk Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, Trunk G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 344). You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid in the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 261). G WARNING The reversing feature does not respond: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement The reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations in particular. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rover Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. Opening and closing manually Opening X Press the F button on the SmartKey. The trunk lid opens. Closing Obstruction detection with reversing feature for the trunk lid Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature: The trunk lid is equipped with automatic obstacle detection with a reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically opening, this procedure is stopped. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically closing, the trunk lid opens again automatically. The automatic obstacle detection with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the trunk lid. Z Opening and closing especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. 83 Trunk 84 Pull the trunk lid down using recess : and push it closed. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76). X Opening and closing Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 344). Opening automatically You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. Closing automatically : Closing button ; Locking button X Press closing button : in the trunk lid. Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's door is closed you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid closes. The vehicle is locked. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk before the closing procedure starts, the trunk lid remains open. Trunk Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot. You could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, for example on ice. RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : may restrict functionality. Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid could thus be opened or closed unintentionally, for example, if you: - sit on the edge of the trunk. - set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle. - polish the rear of the vehicle. Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situations similar to these. This will prevent unintentional opening or closing of the trunk lid. Operation X To open or close: kick into sensor detection range : under the bumper with your foot. A warning tone will sound while the trunk lid is opening or closing. X If the trunk lid does not open or close after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then move your leg under the bumper once again. Z Opening and closing HANDS-FREE ACCESS 85 Opening and closing 86 Trunk If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the trunk lid does not open or close. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. To stop the opening or closing procedure, you have the following options: RKick with your foot into sensor detection range : under the bumper. RPress the closing button on the trunk lid. RPress the F button on the SmartKey If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will open If the trunk lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will close open the trunk lid, pull on the remote operating switch. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 344). Opening and closing Opening/closing automatically from inside Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. To open: pull remote operating switch : for the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens. X To close: press and hold remote operating switch : for the trunk lid until the trunk lid is completely closed. When the vehicle is stationary, you can close the trunk lid from the driver's seat. When the vehicle is also unlocked, you can also open the trunk lid from inside. X G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. In addition, people may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area, e.g. children, during the closing procedure. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Release the remote operating switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. To re- Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. Side windows 87 Side windows Activating the function to lock the trunk separately: X Close the trunk lid. X Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position :. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk remains locked. i You can also lock the glove box (Y page 262). Deactivating the function to lock the trunk separately: X Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position ;. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk will also be unlocked. Emergency release for the trunk You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with the emergency release button. Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. Side window reversing feature Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. X The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from traveling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. Z Opening and closing The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Remergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed Side windows 88 G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Opening and closing Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows The switches for the side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger side window on the frontpassenger door. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. : Front left ; Front right Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch. X To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it. X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the corresponding switch again. If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again. You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. X Convenience opening General notes If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehicle, the convenience opening function is available. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked. Convenience opening Press and hold the % button on the SmartKey until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. X Press and hold the % button once more until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel reaches the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. X Side windows 89 Convenience closing feature G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: if the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehicle, the convenience closing function is available. When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel You can then close the roller sunblinds. Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rthe side window (Y page 87) Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 91) Using the SmartKey Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X X Press and hold the & button once more until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. X Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 88). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 88). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. Z Opening and closing Important safety notes 90 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Problems with the side windows G WARNING Opening and closing If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again closed and you cannot slightly: see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side windows are closed without the automatic reversing feature. Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rduring Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. ! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Only for vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opening and closing Sliding sunroof reversing feature Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof. : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. Z Opening and closing ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of 91 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 92 Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised at the rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically. You can also temporarily deactivate automatic lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel raises again automatically. You can continue to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. When a roof carrier is mounted the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. Opening and closing X Rain-closing feature The raised panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel automatically lowers when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: Rthe road speed and Rthe intensity of the rain You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any direction. To raise the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel again, press the 3 switch in direction :. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated until you: Rpress or pull the 3 switch in any direction or Rturn the SmartKey to another position in the ignition lock (Y page 125) Operating the roller sunblinds for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the roller sunblinds. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react in particular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers. This means that the reversing feature Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Opening and closing the roller sunblinds : To open ; To open = To close You can only close the roller sunblinds when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the 3 switch in direction :. Both roller sunblinds open, then the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised. X Pull the 3 switch in direction ;. The sunblinds open. X Pull the 3 switch in direction =. The roller sunblinds close when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is star- ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front roller sunblind ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblinds if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front roller sunblind does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch several times in the direction of arrow : until the roller sunblinds are closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can be fully opened and closed again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Z Opening and closing cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep area. If somebody becomes trapped: 93 94 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opening and closing Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants. G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Rpress ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more force. If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without the automatic reversing feature. Seats G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Ryou should have a good overview of traffic conditions Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area Further related subjects: RAdjusting the seats electrically (Y page 97). RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 101). RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 46). RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors (Y page 103). RStoring the seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and head-up display settings with the memory function (Y page 106). Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible are sitting in a normal upright position Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly Ryou G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 47) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 58). G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Correct driver's seat position 95 96 Seats Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head. G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. Rkeep ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The rear-compartment head restraints can be removed (Y page 98). Vehicles without the through-loading feature: the head restraints cannot be removed from the rear compartment seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. i Related topic: RRear bench seat (Y page 263) through-loading feature Seats : ; = ? A B Head restraint height Backrest angle Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment i Further related subjects: RYou can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 106). RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavorable position (Y page 56). RWhen the seat is moved forwards or backwards, the headrest is moved up or down automatically. Vehicles with AMG Performance seat: the height of the head restraints cannot be adjusted. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. General notes Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 95). Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. Adjusting the head restraint fore-andaft position manually Adjusting the head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head. X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages in the desired position. X To move backwards: press and hold the release catch :. X Push the head restraint back. X Release the release button once the head restraint is in the desired position. X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged properly. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusts the seats electrically 97 Seats 98 Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head. Adjusting the height of the head restraints electrically To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for the head restraint adjustment (Y page 97) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Vehicles with AMG Performance seat: the height of the head restraints cannot be adjusted. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. Installing and removing rear head restraints Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards (Y page 263). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it engages. X Folding the front seat backrests forward/back Important safety notes G WARNING If the backrest is not engaged, it could fold forwards during a braking maneuver or in the event of an accident, for example. The seat backrest will then push the vehicle occupant against the seat belt. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. There is an increased risk of injury. Before each journey, make sure that the backrest engages fully as described. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 47) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 58). Seats EASY-ENTRY System: the seat moves forwards as soon as you fold the backrest forwards and pull the seat forwards horizontally. This makes it easier for passengers to get into and out of the rear compartment. The head restraint also lowers on vehicles with electric seat adjustment. X Pull the seat release handle : and fold the backrest forwards as far as it will go. The seat moves automatically to the foremost position. Folding the seat backrest back X Swing back the seat backrest. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. The seat moves automatically to the stored position. If the previous position can no longer be set, e.g. because of luggage in the rear-compartment footwell or after occupants have entered the rear-compartment: X Pull seat release handle : again and return the seat backrest to an upright position. The seat locks in the new seat fore-and-aft adjustment position. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support : ; = ? Raises the backrest contour Softens the backrest contour Lowers the backrest contour Hardens the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat To adjust the contour of the seat and for improved lateral support, you can individually adjust the front seats. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cushion X X To set narrower: press button :. To set wider: press button ;. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat backrest X X To set narrower: press button =. To set wider: press button ?. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Folding the seat backrest forward 99 100 Seats Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. i If drive program E (Y page 138) is selected, the power of the seat heating is reduced. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Switching on/off The blue indicator lamps in the button indicate the ventilation level you have selected. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To switch on:press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the slid- ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 88). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan speed can be reduced automatically. This reduces the noises of the seat ventilation. Steering wheel 101 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating or seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat ventilation can be switched back on manually. Steering wheel Important safety notes Adjusting the steering wheel electrically G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. : Adjusts the steering wheel height ; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT RStoring feature (Y page 101) settings (Y page 106) EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Problems with the seat heating / seat ventilation 102 Steering wheel Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function's position buttons. This function is only available on vehicles with memory function. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia system (see the Digital Operating Instructions). Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel swings upwards when you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Rwith KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: open the driver's door; the voltage supply must be switched on Rwith the SmartKey:open the driver's door; the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 125) Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is switched off i The steering wheel only tilts upwards if the driving position is stored after the steering column adjustment has been adjusted (Y page 106). The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored with the memory function (Y page 106). i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper steering limiter. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when: Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on Ryou press the Start/Stop button once in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function i The steering wheel only returns to the last set position if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering column has been adjusted (Y page 106). The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored with the memory function (Y page 106). Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened or the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is operational only if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the multimedia system (see Digital Operating Instructions). Mirrors Exterior mirrors Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. Adjusting the exterior mirrors Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press button =. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior mirror using button : as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press button : up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Briefly press :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. X i If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: press button ;. X Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you activate the Automatic Mir‐ Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Mirrors 103 104 Mirrors ror Folding function in the multimedia system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Briefly press :. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically When the Automatic Mirror Folding function is activated in the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle. i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: manually move the exterior mirror into the correct position. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold button : until you hear a click and then the mirror engaging in position (Y page 103). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 103). If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The exterior mirror on the driver's side and the rear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glare mode if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Storing the parking position Automatic anti-glare mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Memory function Storing using reverse gear 105 Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button =. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rwhen you use button ? to select the exterior mirror on the driver's side : Memory button M ; Button for the exterior mirror setting = Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror ? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror Start the engine. Press button =. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. X X Saving using the memory button You can store the parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using memory button M :. The reverse gear must not be engaged. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Press button =. X Use button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. X Press memory button M : and one of the arrows on button ; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. X After successfully storing, reset the driving position of the exterior mirror. Memory function Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Memory function 106 When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Rposition of the head-up display Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 97). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 101) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103). X Press memory button M and then press one of the memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant memory position button 1, 2 or 3 until the following components are in the saved position: RSeat RSteering wheel mirrors i If you release the memory position switch, the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The Head-up Display continues to be adjusted. RExterior Exterior lighting General notes USA only: if you wish to drive during the daytime without lights, switch off the Daytime Run‐ ning Lights function via the on-board computer (Y page 207). Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: Rlight switch (Y page 107) Rcombination switch (Y page 108) Ron-board computer (Y page 207) Light switch Operation 1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to the à position. The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 in the ignition lock Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. à is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light, but not in the event of poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray. RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on/off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RUSA only: if you have switched on the Day‐ time Running Lights function in the onboard computer, and the engine is running, the daytime running lamps or parking lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched on/off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RCanada only: depending on the ambient light, the daytime running lamps or the parking and low-beam headlamps are switched on/off automatically when the engine is running. X To switch on the automatic headlamps: turn the light switch to the à position. USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. Here, the Daytime Running Lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 207). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to the T or L position, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. Canada only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. Z Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting 107 108 Exterior lighting When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a driving position to P, the daytime running lamps and low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to the T position, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to the L position, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to the L or à position. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up. X Parking lamps ! If the battery charge is very low, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T parking lamps over a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or lefthand W standing lamps. Lights and windshield wipers Low-beam headlamps G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to the L position. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch on the parking lamps: turn the light switch to the T position. The green T indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up. Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove the SmartKey. X Turn the light switch to the W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle) position. Combination switch Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the rear fog lamp. : High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right Exterior lighting To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to the L or à position. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the high-beam headlamps are switched on only when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster goes out. Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it automatically controls activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 109). X High-beam flasher: pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X Hazard warning lamps X switch on a turn signal lamp using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if an air bag is deployed. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Cornering light function The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. To switch the hazard warning lamps on or off: press button :. The turn signal lamps flash when the hazard warning lamps are switched on. If you now Z Lights and windshield wipers = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left 109 Interior lighting 110 Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time. Lights and windshield wipers Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users are detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users are detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off:move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster goes out. Headlamps fogged up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Front overhead control panel Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off To switch on: turn the light switch to the à position. X Press the combination switch forwards beyond the pressure point (Y page 108). The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor switches on the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. X : ; = ? A p Left-hand front reading lamp | Automatic interior lighting control c Front interior lighting u Rear interior lighting p Right-hand front reading lamp Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color and brightness of the ambient lighting are set using the multimedia system; see Digital Operator's Manual. Automatic interior lighting control To switch on or off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via the multimedia system; see Digital Operator's Manual. X Replacing bulbs Important safety notes G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if Ryou touch it Rit is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it. Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been designed for this purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 111). Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Overview of bulb types You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. Halogen headlamps : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W Z 111 Lights and windshield wipers Replacing bulbs Replacing bulbs 112 Replacing front bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) X X Low-beam headlamps Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. Press on housing cover : and turn it clockwise. Lights and windshield wipers Turn signals Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and remove it. X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it clockwise. . X X High-beam headlamps Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 112). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise, unlock and remove it. X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover :, turn it to the right and lock it. X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 112). X Removing and installing the cover in the front wheel housing You must remove the cover of the front wheel housing before you can change the front turn signal lamp. Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and remove it. X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;. X X Windshield wipers To remove: switch off the lights. Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob : 180° outwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover ; is released. X Fold cover ; upwards. X To install: insert cover ; into the left, right and two lower catches. X Turn rotary knob : 180° inwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover ; is locked. 113 X Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wiper on/off 1 2 3 4 5 B ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. X X $ Windshield wiper off Ä Intermittent wiping, normal Å Intermittent wiping, frequent ° Continuous wipe, slow ¯ Continuous wipe, fast í Single wipe î Wipe with washer fluid Switch on the ignition. Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Å or Ä position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Z Lights and windshield wipers X Windshield wipers 114 Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Removing the wiper blades ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. Changing the windshield wiper blades Lights and windshield wipers Adjusting the wiper blades so that they are vertical On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS‑GO start function: Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Set the windshield wipers to the ° position on the combination switch. X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. X Slide the catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click. X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS‑GO start function: Switch off the engine. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wiper to the ° position on the combination switch. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts. X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, press the Start/Stop button. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X X X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ? away from the wiper arm. Installing the wiper blades X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow :. Windshield wipers X Remove the protective film : from the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade. If the color of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. i The duration of the color change varies depending on the usage conditions. Problems with the windshield wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS‑GO start function: X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wipers fail completely. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. zles no longer hits the center of the windshield. Z Lights and windshield wipers Slide the catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X 115 116 Overview of climate control systems Overview of climate control systems Climate control General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior climate. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. Optimum climate control is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. If you start the engine using your smartphone, the last selected climate control setting is reactivated (Y page 128). The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 88). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i It is possible that the blower may be activated automatically 60 minutes after the SmartKey has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the automatic climate control. Control panel for climate control Example: control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 118) ; Sets the air distribution (Y page 119) = Sets the airflow (Y page 119) Switches off climate control (Y page 117) ? A B C D E F G Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 118) Defrosts the windshield (Y page 119) Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 256) Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 120) Activates or deactivates synchronization (Y page 119) Switches air-recirculation mode manually on/off (Y page 120) Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 118) Sets the temperature, right (Y page 118) Optimum use of automatic climate control Optimum use of the automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of dual-zone climate control. RActivate climate control using the à rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated in automatic mode. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. DYNAMIC SELECT switch (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 133). If you have selected drive program E: Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and heat output is reduced as a result Rthe rear window defroster running time is reduced If you have selected drive program C, S or S+, the current climate settings are maintained. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 130). Operating the climate control systems Activating/deactivating climate control General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly Switch on climate control primarily using the à rocker switch (Y page 118). Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H rocker switch. X To switch off:set the airflow to level 0 using the H rocker switch. X 117 Climate control Operating the climate control systems Operating the climate control systems 118 Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off Climate control General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating X Press the ¿ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out. Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp above Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malthe ¿ rocker switch function. remains off. The cooling X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. with air dehumidification function cannot be activated via the multimedia system any longer (Y page 256). Setting climate control to automatic General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. During automatic controlling, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. Automatic control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To activate: press the à rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. X Set the desired temperature using the w rocker switch on the front control unit. X X To switch to manual operation: press the H rocker switch up or down. or Press the _ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch goes out. In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually, the indicator lamp above the à rocker switch goes out. The function which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automatically. When the manually set function switches back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up again. X Setting the temperature Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Operating the climate control systems Activating/deactivating Press the 0 rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the 0 rocker switch lights up or goes out. The synchronization function deactivates if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed. X Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs air through the defroster, center, side and footwell vents b Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents W Sets the air distribution to automatic Setting Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 125). X Press the _ rocker switch up or down. The various air distribution settings appear in the multimedia system. X Setting the airflow Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To increase or reduce: press the H rocker switch up or down. X Activating or deactivating the synchronization function General notes Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature setting is adopted for the front-passenger side. Defrosting the windshield General notes You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front side windows on the inside. Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again. Switching the "Windshield defrosting" function on or off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To switch on:press the ¬ rocker switch on the front control unit up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker switch lights up. The current climate control settings are deactivated. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. In this case, the indicator lamp above the ¿ rocker switch remains switched off. X To deactivate: press rocker switch ¬ up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. X Climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To increase or reduce: press the w rocker switch up or down. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X 119 Operating the climate control systems 120 Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function with the ¿ rocker switch. Switch on automatic mode using the à rocker switch. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" function using the ¬ rocker switch. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. Climate control X Windows fogged up on the outside Activate the windshield wipers. Switch on automatic mode using the à rocker switch. i If you clean the windows regularly, they do not fog up so quickly. X X Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. Switching on/off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¤ rocker switch lights up or goes out. X Problems with the rear window defroster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated. X The battery has not been sufficiently charged. Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off General notes You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up. Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To activate:press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch lights up. Air-recirculation mode switches on automatically: Rat high outside temperatures Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system only) The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X Operating the climate control systems To deactivate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch goes out. Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated 121 Perfume atomizer Operating the perfume atomizer G WARNING If children open the vial, they could drink the perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean water. If you continue to experience difficulties, consult a doctor. H Environmental note Full vials must not be disposed of with household waste. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of full vials in an environmentally responsible manner and take them to a harmful substance collection point. : Vial lid ; Vial The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving comfort. Via the multimedia system you can: Rswitch the perfume atomizer on/off (Y page 256) Rregulate the perfume intensity (Y page 256). The following conditions can affect your perception of the perfume intensity: Roperating mode of the climate control system Rinterior temperature Rtime of year or day Rair humidity Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fatigue or hunger The perfume atomizer is active only when the glove box is closed. The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-filled vial. You can also choose from a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you can fill yourself. If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the separate information sheet attached to the vial. ! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use. X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove box (Y page 262). X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go. X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the perfume vial. Z Climate control X Air vents 122 To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself. X Fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the desired liquid perfume. X Screw the lid back on to the vial. Climate control X Always refill the empty refillable vial with the same perfume. Otherwise, you might not achieve optimum results from the perfume atomizer. ! Only refill the vial when you are outside the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip into the interior and contaminate it. Problems with the perfume atomizer Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The vehicle interior is not The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will perfumed although the go. perfume atomizer is acti- X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go. vated. The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently. X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial. X Use a new pre-filled vial. X Refillable vials: fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the same perfume. The perfume atomizer is faulty. Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Ionization Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate. The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle interior. You can switch ionization on or off using the multimedia system (Y page 256). Ionization can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open. Air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. Air vents 123 Setting the air vents Air vents are located: the left and right-hand side of the dashboard Rin the middle of the dashboard Rin the rear center console, depending on the equipment installed Climate control Ron Side air vent (example) : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent, left = Control for left side air vent To open or close: turn control = to the counter-clockwise or clockwise as far as it will go. X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent ; by control = and move it up or down or to the left or right. Adjusting the rear air vents (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Z 124 Driving Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Driving and parking Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RWhen changing gears manually, change up in good time, before the tachometer needle reaches Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in drive program E. Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program C. After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed. Self-locking rear axle differential (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil to improve protection of the rear axle differential: Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles (3,000 km) Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years These oil changes prolong the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. When using floormats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place several floormats or carpets on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes Driving SmartKey positions SmartKey G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. Start/Stop button General notes When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. Z Driving and parking G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. 125 Driving and parking 126 Driving To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76). Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again. If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 81), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Key positions with the Start/Stop button If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. The ignition is switched off again if: Ryou do not start the engine from this position within 15 minutes Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop button mode and SmartKey operation when the transmission is in position P. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Warning and indicator lamps: see (Y page 240). Driving Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. General notes The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 135). The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 136). i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N. Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the engine is running (Y page 125). If the engine will not start: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock after a short waiting period. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up (Y page 240). X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the engine is running (Y page 125). Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button is only available on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function. The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the Z Driving and parking Starting the engine 127 128 Driving Driving and parking vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 125). The engine starts. Starting procedure via smartphone Observe the important safety notes on starting the engine (Y page 127). You can also start your engine via your smartphone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the previously selected climate control setting is activated. In this way you can cool or heat the interior of the vehicle before starting the journey. Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. Observe the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smartphone may be limited to certain countries or regions. You can execute a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts via your smartphone. If you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you can carry out two more starting attempts. Once you have started the engine, you can switch the engine off via your smartphone at any time. You can only start the engine via your smartphone if: Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock Rpark position P is selected Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated Rthe panic alarm is not activated Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off Rthe hood is closed. Rthe doors are closed and locked Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed Also make sure that: Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged G WARNING Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during ser- vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of injury. Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone before carrying out maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine start via your smartphone, for example, if you: Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps Rdo not lock the doors Ropen the hood Pulling away General notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual. It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (Y page 147). Driving General notes Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. Ryou ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. : ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened. All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Z Driving and parking Hill start assist 129 130 Driving Driving and parking Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of consecutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimited. All other models: automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times in a row (initial switch-off, then three subsequent switchoffs). Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function Mercedes-AMG vehicles Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button vehicles: you switch to drive program RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S Rall other vehicles: you switch to drive program S+ RMercedes-AMG vehicles: you permanently activate manual gearshifting (Y page 140) Rin transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. RMercedes-AMG To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if: RMercedes-AMG vehicles: you switch to drive program RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Y page 133) RC 450 AMG 4MATIC: you switch to drive program S+ or S (Y page 133) Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting (Y page 140) If you have permanently activated manual gearshifting and then press ECO button :, the ECO start/stop function is activated. All other models Driving 131 To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the ECO start/stop function. If you press ECO button :, the ECO start/stop function is activated. AMG performance exhaust system can be selected (Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between different AMG Performance exhaust system volumes using the position of the exhaust flap. Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the quietest setting is activated. Setting the volume: X Press button :. If you select the loudest setting, indicator lamp lights up ;. You can also adjust the position of the exhaust flap using the: RDYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 133) RMercedes-AMG vehicles: multimedia system Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 163) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155). X Try to start the engine again (Y page 127). Z Driving and parking X Driving and parking 132 Driving Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display is at the reserve level. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 127). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel tank is empty. Refuel the vehicle. X The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 302). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 127). If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical smoothly and is misfircomponent of the engine management system. ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently. above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 284). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. DYNAMIC SELECT switch DYNAMIC SELECT switch 133 Selecting the drive program Mercedes-AMG vehicles Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Available drive programs: RACE (S‑MODEL) Driving characteristics suitable for the racetrack S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics I Individual Individual settings Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine management) Rthe transmission management RESP® Rthe suspension Rthe position of the exhaust flap Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe driver assistance systems Rthe availability of gliding mode Further information for automatic drive program characteristics (Y page 138). Additionally, in drive program I you can configure the respective vehicle characteristics using the multimedia system. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 127). X Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forwards or backwards until the desired drive program is selected. The status icon of the selected drive program is shown in the multifunction display. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the multimedia system display. You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 140). Additional settings Position of the exhaust flap (Y page 131) ECO start/stop function (Y page 129) ESP® (Y page 67) Suspension (Y page 165) Permanent activation of manual gearshifting (Y page 140) When you press buttons : - A the corresponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC SELECT switch setting is overwritten. These settings will also be maintained if you change with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch in drive program RACE (S-MODEL), S+, S or C. : ; = ? A Z Driving and parking General information Automatic transmission 134 If you switch to drive program I, all stored characteristics will be accepted. This is also the case if you have previously pressed one of buttons : - A. Driving and parking All other models Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension. Rthe steering. Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control - the climate control settings - the rear window defroster operation period - the performance of the seat heating Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 127). Available drive programs: I Individual Individual settings S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics E Economy Particularly economical driving characteristics Additional information for drive programs (Y page 138). You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 140). Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forward or back until the desired drive program is selected. The status icon of the selected drive program is shown in the multifunction display. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the multimedia system display. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any drive program, regardless of the display in the multimedia system display. X The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions 135 PLUS is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 164) and on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 158). Engaging reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 129). X j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 136). Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Engaging park position P the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle Rrelease is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Engaging park position P automatically Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC Ropen the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X Z Driving and parking ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R Automatic transmission Driving and parking 136 If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Engaging drive position D If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. : Status symbol drive program ; Transmission position = Gear The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. For this purpose, we recommend selecting transmission position D and drive program E (drive program C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) or S. B C Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary (Y page 135). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Reverse gear You can shift the transmission into position R only when the vehicle is stationary (Y page 135). A 137 Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. Driving and parking Transmission positions Automatic transmission ! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Double-clutch function When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function Z 138 Automatic transmission reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Driving and parking Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Gliding mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Ryou switch to drive program RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Y page 133). Ryou activate manual gearshifting (Y page 140). Ryou leave the suitable speed range. i If you have selected the "Comfort" setting for the drive (engine management) in drive program I, you can also activate gliding mode. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Drive programs All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Drive program I (Individual) Gliding mode is characterized by the following: Rthe combustion engine is disconnected from the drive train. Rthe engine speed corresponds to the idling speed. Rstatus icon C goes out and status icon : is displayed in the multifunction display (Y page 136). In drive program C, you can deactivate and activate gliding mode using the ECO button (Y page 130). Gliding mode can be activated under the following conditions: Rthe speed is within a suitable range. Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. there are no steep up or downhill gradients. Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator pedal. Gliding mode is deactivated under the following conditions: Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou depress the brake pedal. Ryou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position (Y page 135). In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management). Rthe suspension. Rthe steering. Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function. Rthe climate control. Information about configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found under "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital Operator's Manual. i To permanently select the gears in drive program I using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the drive. Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Automatic transmission Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnected from the drive train. The vehicle uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (overrun mode). Rthe cooling and heating output of the climate control system has been reduced. Mercedes-AMG vehicles Drive program RACE (S‑MODEL) The RACE drive program is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics suitable for the racetrack. Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum sportiness. Rthe gearshift recommendation gives you information for slowly warming up the drive assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient driving style (Y page 140). You can follow the gearshift recommendations at all times and shift gear accordingly using the steering wheel paddle shifters. On the basis of the gearshift recommendation, using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you can optimize the drive train and engine operating mode at any time. Rif you have selected a gear manually, this will be maintained until the vehicle speed increases or decreases dramatically. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Z Driving and parking Drive program S (Sport) 139 140 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. The fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is available. Manual gear shifting General notes You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D. Depending on which steering wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. Mercedes-AMG vehicles and MercedesBenz C 450 AMG 4MATIC: to use manual shifting, you have two options: Rtemporary setting Rpermanent setting If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear instead of transmission position D. If you deactivate manual gearshifting, the gears will be shifted automatically again. Temporary setting Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine management). Rthe transmission management. RESP® (Y page 67) Rthe suspension. Ractivation of the exhaust flap. Information about configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found under "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital Operator's Manual. i To permanently select the gears in drive program I using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the transmission. To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D. X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;. X Temporary setting will be active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ; and hold it in place. or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. Automatic transmission or X 141 Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the drive program. To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X X or X To deactivate: press button :. If position D (automatic transmission) is selected for the transmission in drive program I: shift to drive program I with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Indicator lamp ; goes out. Shifting gears Shift recommendation ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Z Driving and parking Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles and Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) 142 Automatic transmission Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) X Driving and parking ! The automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. When message : appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. Kickdown For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel paddle shifters. If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only possible in the temporary setting. X Problems with the transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle. ger changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Transfer case This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles. ! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test. Refueling tion must be switched off (the SmartKey or Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC). The brake system could otherwise be damaged. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. otherwise electrostatic charge could build up again. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 339). Refueling General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 143). Z Driving and parking ! Since ESP® engages automatically, the igni- 143 Refueling 144 If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Driving and parking Opening the fuel filler flap Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. X Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 228). X : ; = ? To open the fuel filler flap To insert the fuel filler cap Tire pressure table Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled Switch off the engine. Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X X Parking 145 Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 75). The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 77). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. Z Driving and parking Problem Parking Driving and parking 146 To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 125). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to SmartKey position 0: "Key removed". X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. The engine can be switched off in an emergency while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Electric parking brake General notes G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift Parking It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. Applying or releasing manually X To apply: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed. To release: pull handle :. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button X Applying automatically The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle :. The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if: RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Releasing automatically Your vehicle's electric parking brake is automatically released if all of the following conditions are met: Rthe seat belt has been fastened. Rthe engine is running. Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. or you shift the transmission position from P to position D or R. You will need to accelerate more on steeper gradients. If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed. Z Driving and parking The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. 147 Driving and parking 148 Driving tips If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 147). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle : of the electric parking brake depressed. The longer electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Please Release Parking Brake message appears Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged. Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Driving tips General driving tips Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Main- Driving tips Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. ECO display The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. Driving and parking tenance Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. 149 : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve Fuel display message is shown instead of range ? in the multifunction display. The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up (Y page 245). Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Always have work on the engine carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the MercedesBenz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Z 150 Driving tips Driving and parking The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: : Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceleration ; Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking = Constant(continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: Rload Rtire pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Relectrical consumers switched on These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. Achieving a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive in drive program E. On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (Y page 199). For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 198). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a lower gear in good time. This allows you to take advantage of the engine's braking effect. This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out excessively. Driving tips Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- formance tests may only be carried out on a 2axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP® system operates automatically. The engine and the ignition must therefore be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if the electric parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer. Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may cause severe damage to the brake system. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 63) and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 63). Z Driving and parking When you take advantage of engine braking, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. 151 Driving and parking 152 Driving tips For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends only installing the following brake disks and brake pads/linings: Rbrake disks that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/ linings on an axle at the same time. Always install new brake pads/linings when replacing brake disks. The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and threaded connection is matched. The use of brake disks other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the track width and is subject to approval, if applicable. Shock-type loads when handling the brake discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead to a reduction in comfort when driving with lightweight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the brake plate. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. High-performance and ceramic brakes (Mercedes AMG vehicles) The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: RSpeed RBraking force REnvironmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain more information on this from a qualified specialist workshop. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly. Driving on wet roads Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed. Ravoid ruts. Ravoid sudden steering movements. Rbrake carefully. Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. Failure to observe these notes may result in damage to the engine, electrical systems and transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rin the case of standing water, the water level may be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body Ryou should drive no faster than at a walking pace Driving systems G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 313). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 312). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 312). Driving systems Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users. Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 62). Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes Cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle Z Driving and parking Winter driving 153 Driving and parking 154 Driving systems speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored. Cruise control lever Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. X X i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Activates or increases speed Activates or reduces speed Deactivates cruise control Activates at the current speed/last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. The é symbol appears on the multifunction display. Speedometer with segments: when cruise control is activated, the segments from the stored speed to the end of the scale light up. : ; = ? Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincrements (1 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincrements (10 km/hincrements): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving If cruise control deactivates, a warning tone sounds. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. The message on the multifunction display disappears and the segments in the speedometer go out. i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. DISTRONIC PLUS General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance from the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Z 155 Driving and parking Driving systems 156 Driving systems Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Driving and parking Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions that do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries) If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Driving systems Cruise control lever 157 Activating Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or push it up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ? or push it up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Activates or increases speed Activates or reduces speed Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS Activates at the current speed/last stored speed A Sets a specified minimum distance : ; = ? When you activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the stored speed appears in the multifunction display for five seconds. Speedometer with segments: when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the segments from the stored speed to the end of the scale or to a permanently set speed limit light up. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be activated, but not intervening at present. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift the transmission from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed. Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previously stored value. X Z Driving and parking X Driving systems 158 Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the stored speed. The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle in front, the system operates like a cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving slower, your vehicle brakes. In this way, the specified minimum distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving faster, your vehicle accelerates to the stored speed. Stopping Selecting the drive program For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 160). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has stopped, it will cause your vehicle to brake and come to a halt. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: X Driving and parking When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane (on left-hand-drive vehicles) or the right lane (on right-hand-drive vehicles). DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or S+ driving program (Y page 138). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the C or E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stopand-start traffic. Changing lanes DISTRONIC PLUS aids you when switching to the overtaking lane, if: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of a collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Driving systems 159 Setting a speed Push the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincrements (1 km/hincrements): briefly push the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincrements (10 km/hincrements): briefly push the cruise control lever up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed back to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Setting a specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle in front, depending on the driving speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 160). Make sure that you maintain the minimum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, the segments between the speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed ; light up. Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package: the segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane. For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Z Driving and parking The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may also shift into position P automatically. Driving systems 160 Driving and parking Displays in the assistance graphic : ; = ? : ; = ? X Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Vehicle in front, if detected Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable Own vehicle Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) Vehicle in front, if detected Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable Own vehicle To call up the assistance graphic:select the Assistance Graphic function using the onboard computer (Y page 204). You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly push the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle is skidding Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS Off message will be displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the road because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. RObstacles and stationary vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot General notes DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot helps you keep the vehicle in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions in a speed range from 0–125 mph (0–200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera :, at the top of the windshield. In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when you are following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h), Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in front if clear lane markings are not present. If these conditions are not present, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance. DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the Z 161 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 162 Driving systems vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lane Ryou switch on the turn signal Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated again automatically after a lane change is completed. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not provide any support: Ron very sharp corners Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 156). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+: Steering Assist. On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated. Information in the multifunction display If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but is not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green. Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+: Steering Assist. Off message appears in Driving systems HOLD function General notes To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 164). Activation conditions The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Important safety notes Activating the HOLD function G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. X Z Driving and parking the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated. When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically. 163 164 Driving systems Driving and parking Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until display ë disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission may be shifted into position P automatically. RACE START Important safety notes i RACE START must not be used on normal roads. RACE START must only be activated and used on dedicated road circuits, outside of public road use. i RACE START is only available in Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, along with the tires and vehicle being in proper operating condition. G WARNING If you use RACE START, individual tires may start to spin and the vehicle could skid. Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles are within range of the vehicle. i Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 62). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 67). Conditions for activation You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 160 ‡ (71 †). This is the case when the oil temperature gauge in the multifunction display is shown in white. Rthe drive program S, S+ or Race is selected. (Y page 133) Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot). Rthe transmission is in position D. Activating RACE START i When manual mode (Y page 140) is active, the transmission automatically shifts up to RACE START in the drive program. This function supports maximum acceleration with RACE START. After going through an accelerating process once from a stationary position, this function is automatically deactivated. X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 140). The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 140). i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. X or To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 140). To confirm: pull the right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 140). The RACE START Available Depress gas pedal. message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Not Possible See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed rises to approximately 3,500 rpm. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not release the brake pedal within five seconds, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START Active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Canada: 50 km/h). RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐ sible See Operator's Manual or RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. X laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control and ADS (Adaptive Damping System). The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 133) or the level button (Y page 165). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function. Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not lowered. Vehicle level Setting the raised vehicle level i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a short period of time, it is only available again after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance. AIRMATIC General notes AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable damping for improved driving comfort. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Start the engine. Z 165 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 166 If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Comfort tuning Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level. The Vehicle Rising message appears in the multifunction display. i The message disappears after ten seconds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 50 mph (80 km/h). The "Raised level" remains active when you are not driving within these speed ranges. In the E and Cdrive programs, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. X Select the E or C drive program with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 133). The vehicle is raised to the normal level. When driving at speeds above 78 mph (125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C drive programs. When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again. Driving and parking X Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the currently selected drive program (Y page 133). Suspension tuning General notes The Adaptive Damping System automatically controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Sports tuning In the S and S+ drive programs, the firmer suspension setting ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Select the S or S+ drive program with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 133). The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level. AMG adaptive sport suspension system General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort The suspension setting is adjusted using the corresponding button in the center console. i The mode can also be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 133). This is only possible if: Rusing the AMG adaptive sport suspension system button on the center console, and Rusing the DYNAMIC SELECT switch, the same mode is selected for the chassis. This is the case, for example, when both are set to Comfort mode. Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 127). Driving systems X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps ; and = go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button :. Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Sport + mode The very firm setting of the suspension setting in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits. If indicator lamps ; and = are off: X Press button : twice. Indicator lamps ; and = light up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display. If indicator lamp = lights up: X Press button : once. Second indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort mode In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. highways. 4MATIC ensures permanent drive for all four wheels. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC does not take into account Rthe road and weather conditions Rthe traffic situation 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAccelerate less when driving. ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Z Driving and parking Sport mode 167 168 Driving systems Driving and parking PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Range of the sensors PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. : ; = ? Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners) Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners) Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center) Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center) The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 290). Minimum distance Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instrument cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if operational readiness indicator = lights up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission posi- Warning display tion D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas activated rolling backwards P d e : ; Switch on the dashboard Switch in the center console Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC Indicator lamp If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. Z 169 Driving and parking Driving systems 170 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified speing displays are lit. You cialist workshop. also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments in The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. the PARKTRONIC warn- X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 290). ing displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 167). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta- cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, for example: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible. RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 169) warning messages during the parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist is then deactivated RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RAlways pay attention to the specified tire pressure for your vehicle. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb Ryou park forwards Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb Rthe system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these objects You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. For further information on the detection range (Y page 168). : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Z 171 Driving and parking Driving systems 172 Driving systems Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle Driving and parking i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the size of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into the parking space. When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Parking G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away. i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are responsible for braking in good time. X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% No: message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure:press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist Active Select D Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. Driving systems Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered into a position at a maximum of 45° to the starting position in the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time. X Start the engine. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: No:% message appears on the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure:press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears on the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. X Depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to position D or R. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears on the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist Switched Off message appears on the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over Z Driving and parking The Park Assist Active Select R Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Switched Off message appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. 173 Driving systems 174 the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful if you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. Rear view camera General notes Canceling Active Parking Assist Driving and parking X or Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 169). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately canceled. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Rtransmission position P is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist Canceled message. When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again. X Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. i The text shown in the multimedia system depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera displays in the multimedia system. Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 290) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, rear bicycle rack). The rear view camera is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 290). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated. ! Objects not at ground level may appear to Activating/deactivating the rear view camera : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- To switch on: make sure that the Activa‐ tion by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process. X X or X be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) To switch off:shift the transmission to position P. Drive forwards a short distance. Multimedia display The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) Z 175 Driving and parking Driving systems 176 Driving systems C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately Driving and parking 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle When the transmission is shifted to position R, guidelines appear in the camera image. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. "Reverse parking" function Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel : White guide line without turning the steering E Front warning display F Rear warning display G Additional vehicle icon: PARKTRONIC meas- urement operational readiness indicator Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 169), vehicle symbol G appears in the multimedia system display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays E and F are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system display. wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 175). The lane and the guide lines appear. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Driving systems 177 : White guide line at current steering wheel angle : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X After driving past the parking space, stop the vehicle safely. X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 175). The lane and the guide lines appear in the camera image. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully. ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary. : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. Z Driving and parking Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle 178 Driving systems Driving and parking "Wide-angle" function : Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays You can also use the rear view camera to select a wide-angle view. When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 169), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the display of the multimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays = light up in the multimedia system display in yellow or red respectively. Object detection The rear view camera helps detect moving and stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle or other obstacle) is detected, this object is marked with a bar. Objects located some distance from the vehicle away are marked with a yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very small, the bar is displayed in red. Object detection only works in wide-angle view. To ensure that you can use the function, it must be switched on in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). 360° camera General notes The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras. The system processes images from the following cameras: RRear view camera RFront camera RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors The cameras cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, for example when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit. You can show images from the 360° camera in full-screen mode or in six different split-screen views on the multimedia system. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The six split-screen views are: RTop view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle) RTop view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) RTop view and enlarged rear view RTop view and enlarged front view RTop view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view) RTop view and images from the forward-facing side cameras (front wheel view) When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the guide lines are hidden in the multimedia system. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed: Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is from an object. Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC is active Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle Rred line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle Important safety notes The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, Driving systems Activation conditions The image from the 360° camera appears if: Rthe multimedia system is switched on Rthe 360° Camera function is switched on If you are driving faster than at a moderate speed and you turn on the 360° camera, a warning message appears. The warning message disappears if: Ryou are again driving at a moderate speed The 360° camera is then activated. Rthe message is confirmed with the % button. Switching the 360° camera on and off using the button To switch on: press button :. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera X To switch off: press button :. X Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You Z Driving and parking make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The 360° camera will not function or will function in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered Rif the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. The guide lines in the multimedia system display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. The camera in the rear area is protected by means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360° camera is activated. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 290). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the 360° camera has been deactivated. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments (e.g. license plate holder, rear bicycle carrier). On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, depending on technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in: Rinaccuracies in the guide lines Rinaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view) 179 Driving systems 180 see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera. Top view with picture from the rear view camera Driving and parking Selecting the split-screen view or full screen mode Switching between split screen views: X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide 5 the controller. X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller. Switching to full screen mode: Turn and press 180° View with the controller. The full screen option is only available in the following views: RTop view with picture from the rear view camera RTop view with picture from the front camera X : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx; Multimedia display = ? Important safety notes A The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations: Runder the front and rear bumpers Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid Rvery close to the exterior mirrors Rin the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image Guide line for the maximum steering angle Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle D Bumper E Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle When the transmission is shifted to position R, guidelines appear in the camera image. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Top view with picture from the front camera Top view with image from the side cameras : Symbol for the split screen setting with top : Symbol for the top view and forward-facing ; ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width = ? A B view and front camera image Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle side camera setting including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle) i You can also select the side camera setting for the rear-facing view. 180° view Top view and enlarged rear view : Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you. i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view. ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays i 180° view can also be selected as front view. Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. If you select the % symbol in the display and confirm with the controller, the split-screen view appears. Z 181 Driving and parking Driving systems 182 Driving systems Driving and parking Exiting 360° camera display mode The 360° camera display is stopped: Rwhen you select transmission position P or Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds The view that was active before the 360° camera was displayed appears in the multimedia system display. You can also stop the 360° camera display split-screen view by selecting the % symbol in the display and then confirming with the COMAND controller. The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment is deleted and restarted when continuing the journey, if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Displaying the attention level ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h) Rif you are driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist activated Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed In the Assistance menu (Y page 204) of the onboard computer, you can call up the current status information. X Select the Assistance display for Attention Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 204). The following information appears: RLength of the journey since the last break. RThe attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST (Attention Attention Level Level), displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h). Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 206). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: If Standard is selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. If Sensitive is selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a Break!. Break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. Vehicles with COMAND multimedia system: if a warning appears in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in the multimedia system. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in the COMAND multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Traffic Sign Assist General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are used to determine the current speed limit. Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There is also no display for changing traffic signs. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also shown. The sign indicating the end of a restriction only appears with the restriction in the instrument cluster when: Rthe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit appears in the instrument cluster either. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, display : appears in the assistance graphic (Y page 204). Important safety notes Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date. Instrument cluster display Displaying the assistance graphic X Call up the assistance graphic display function using the on-board computer (Y page 204). Detected traffic signs appear in the instrument cluster. Z 183 Driving and parking Driving systems 184 Driving systems Speed limit with unknown restriction Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Driving and parking Rvehicles : Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant = Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph (80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply. The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account when observing the maximum permitted speed. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 184) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 186). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. Monitoring area In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray Driving systems bicycles Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Warning lamp : Warning lamp At a distance of around 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; from the vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : your vehicle, as shown in the picture. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks. Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. The red warning lamp flashes on the relevant exterior mirror. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of the red warning lamp on the exterior mirror. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 205). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. The red warning lamps on the exterior mirrors light up until the engine is started. X Z Driving and parking Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or 185 186 Driving systems Display in the assistance graphic Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Driving and parking Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Rnot When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display (Y page 204). Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance graphic changes to green :. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : which is attached behind the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist To activate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep‐ ing Assist On message appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, there may be a warning. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 204) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. X To deactivate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist Off message appears in the multifunction display. X Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. Driving Assistance PLUS package General notes The Driving Assistance PLUS package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 187) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 190). Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting Active Blind Spot Assist In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Lane Keeping Assist function (Y page 206). X Select Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. Standard When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot X General notes Z 187 Driving and parking Driving systems 188 Driving systems Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Driving and parking Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. Monitoring area G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : your vehicle, as shown in the picture. The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time. Warning lamp When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. : Warning lamp Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a coursecorrecting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a double warning tone sounds. In addition, a display underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-corZ 189 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems Driving and parking 190 recting brake application may be interrupted at any time by countersteering slightly or accelerating. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 205). X Switch on the ignition. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance graphic in the multifunction display ;. X Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : at the top of the windshield. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recognize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Driving systems 191 covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made. Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed. A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking detected as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected. A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. RESP® is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Ran obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected. Z Driving and parking Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or Driving systems Driving and parking 192 Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction. Rswitch on the turn signal. Rclearly brake or accelerate. A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist To activate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep‐ ing Assist On message appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, a warning or steering intervention may be made. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic (Y page 204) appear in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. X To deactivate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist Off message appears in the multifunction display. X Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist function (Y page 206). X Select Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: X Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. Displays and operation G WARNING Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 35). The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using brightness control knob :. X Turn brightness control knob : up or down. If you turn the light switch (Y page 107) to the T, à or L position, the brightness will depend upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is not possible in daylight. Speedometer with segments The speedometer is divided into segments depending on the equipment. The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 153): The segments light up from the stored speed to the end of the scale. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 155): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Z On-board computer and displays Important safety notes 193 194 Displays and operation Tachometer Operating the on-board computer On-board computer and displays ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 195). Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel To activate the on-board computer: switch on the power supply. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel X Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. ò ROpens 9 : Press briefly: RScrolls in lists a menu or function RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens the track or station list and selects a station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number RSelects ! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. The coolant temperature gauge is in the lower section of the tachometer (Y page 35). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). the menu list 9 : Press and hold: RScrolls quickly through all lists the Radio or Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open RIn a ñ % RIn all menus: confirms the selected entry in the list RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources or media RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected number with multimedia system Audio 20: Switches off voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with multimedia system COMAND: Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) 8 RMute ó RVehicles RVehicles with multimedia system Audio 20: Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with multimedia system COMAND: Switches on the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) Multifunction display Press briefly: RBack RIn the Radio or Media menu: dese- lects the track or station list or list of available radio sources or media RHides display messages RExits the telephone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ~ RRejects 6 RMakes W X or ends a call the telephone book/redial memory RExits or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches RAdjusts the volume : ; = ? A B Drive program (Y page 136) Transmission position (Y page 137) Additional speedometer Display Time Outside temperature (Y page 194) Display panel ? shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. X To open the menu list: press the ò button on the steering wheel. Display panel ? appears in the menu list. Possible displays in the multifunction display: RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (Y page 140) Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 170) R¯ Cruise control (Y page 153) Z 195 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation 196 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 161) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 109) Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 129) Rë HOLD function (Y page 163) Displays and operation Switching the head-up display on/off Head-up display General notes The head-up display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the dashboard into the driver's field of vision. The head-up display allows the driver to see all of the information without having to take their eyes off the road. A requirement for the display of the contents is that the following functions are available in the vehicle and are switched on: RCruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RTraffic Sign Assist RNavigation X Press button :. When the head-up display is switched on, the display appears in the driver's field of vision. Standard displays in the head-up display Important safety notes The head-up display is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. The visibility of the head-up display is influenced by the following conditions: Rthe driver's seat position Rthe positioning of the display image Rthe general ambient light Rsunglasses with polarization filters Rwet roads Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display cover In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the display may fade. This can be reversed by switching the head-up display off and on again. i Vehicles with the head-up display are equipped with a special windshield. Should repairs be necessary, have the windshield replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. : ; = ? Navigation messages Current speed Detected traffic signs Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set speed Menus and submenus Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select the following menu: RTrip menu (Y page 197) instructions) RNavi menu (navigation (Y page 199) RRadio menu (Y page 201) menu (Y page 201) RTelephone menu (Y page 203) RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 204) RService menu (Y page 204) RSettings menu (Y page 204) RAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG or in MercedesBenz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles (Y page 208) RMedia : Upshift indicator ; Currently selected gear, gearshift options = ? A B when shifting manually RACETIMER Lap Current engine speed Current speed Trip menu Standard display Setting options You can adjust the following settings in the head-up display submenu: Radjust the position of the head-up display on the windshield (Y page 207) Radjust the brightness of the displays in the head-up display (Y page 207) Rselect desired displays in the head-up display (Y page 206) Using the Display Content function, you can, depending on your vehicle's equipment, choose between four standard displays. The selected contents then appear in the head-up display. In Mercedes-AMG or in Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-specific contents. If you select a display with traffic signs, detected traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in the head-up display. X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; appears. Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 194). Z On-board computer and displays AMG displays in the head-up display 197 198 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Displaying the range and current fuel consumption If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 149). Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset" : Range of the fuel supply ; Current fuel consumption = Recuperation display Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only displays the approximate range. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press 9 or : to select the display. Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C appears instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. ECO display The ECO display is not available in MercedesAMG vehicles. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select ECO display. : ; = ? Distance Driving time Average speed Average fuel consumption Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select From Start or From Reset Reset. The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 199). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From Start: Start Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically Reset. reset From Reset X Menus and submenus Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the digital speedometer. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Route guidance not active Resetting values Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a briefly. X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset. X Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions : Direction of travel ; Current road Route guidance active No change of direction announced : ; = ? Distance to the next destination Estimated arrival time Distance to the next change of direction Current road In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. You can find further information on navigation instructions in the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. Z On-board computer and displays Digital speedometer 199 On-board computer and displays 200 Menus and submenus Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Change of direction without lane recommendation Target of the change of direction Distance to the change of direction Change-of-direction symbol Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction (white) A Possible lane B Lane not recommended (dark gray) : Road into which the change of direction : ; = ? On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended B: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible lane A: you will only be able to complete the next change of direction in this lane. Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that. leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero. Change of direction with lane recommendation : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane recommendation Other status indicators of the navigation system : Additional information Other possible additional information: RNew Route... orCalculating Calculating Route... A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Radio menu position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. You can store radio stations in the multimedia system. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Radio menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Currently set station ; appears in the multifunction display. X To open the station list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a station in the station list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a station in the station list using rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9. X To select the waveband or station memory: press a briefly. X Press : or 9 to select the waveband or station memory. X Press a to confirm the selection. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. Further information about radio operation can be found in the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual. Media menu Changing the media source : ; = ? Frequency band Station frequency with memory position Name of artist Name of track The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset You can change the media source and playback mode (audio or video) at any time in the Media menu. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To open the media sources list: press a briefly. The list shows the following media sources, for example: Z 201 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus 202 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays RCD or DVD (DVD only in the COMAND mul- timedia system) RSD card RMedia Register (only in the COMAND multimedia system) RUSB storage device RBluetooth® capable audio device Please observe further information on media support and media operation in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Operating an audio player or audio media To select the next or previous track from the track list:press the : or 9 button briefly. X To select a track from the track list using rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the button, the speed of rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If the corresponding track information is stored on the audio player or media, the multifunction display shows the following: Rtrack number Rthe name of the track Rthe name of the artist Ralbum The track information does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). X Video DVD operation : Media source, e.g. name of USB memory ; = ? A stick Current title Name of artist Name of album Folder name Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To select an audio player or media:press a briefly. The list containing the media sources appears. X Press : or 9 to select the corresponding audio player or media. X Press a to confirm. X To open the track list:press the : or 9 button briefly. Switch on the multimedia system. Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To select a DVD single drive or disc:press a briefly. The list containing the media sources appears. X Press : or 9 to select the corresponding DVD single drive or disc. X Press a to confirm. X To open the scene list:press the : or 9 button briefly. X X Menus and submenus Telephone menu Introduction Accepts a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐ phone menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time regardless of the menu selected. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. Rejects or ends a call X G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions). X Switch on the multimedia system. X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call. Selecting an entry in the phone book Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the :, 9 or a button to switch to the phone book. X Using : or 9, select the names one after the other. or X To start rapid scrolling:press and hold : or 9 for longer than one second. The names are displayed quickly one after the other in the phone book. If you press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than five seconds, the name with the next or previous initial letter in the alphabet appears. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name:press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the : or 9 button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the telephone book:press the ~ or % button briefly. X Z On-board computer and displays To select the next or previous scene in the scene list:press the : or 9 button briefly. X To select a scene from the scene list using rapid scrolling:press and hold : or 9 until desired scene : is reached. X Press a to confirm your selection. X 203 Menus and submenus 204 On-board computer and displays Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the : or 9 button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the redial memory:press the ~ or % button briefly. Assistance graphic menu RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 184) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 187) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 182) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 186) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 190) X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. Service menu Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Service menu: RCalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 212) RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) (Y page 317) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 319) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 285) Settings menu Introduction Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Assistance Graphic menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RDistance display of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155) RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 183) RDistance warning and the autonomous braking function COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 65) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 71) X Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Settings menu: RChanging assistance settings (Y page 204) RChanging head-up display settings (Y page 206) RChanging the light settings (Y page 207) RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 207) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 208) Assistance submenu Deactivating/activating ESP® Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP® (Y page 68). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Menus and submenus It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Activate/deactivate ESP® in Mercedes-AMG vehicles and in Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles (Y page 69). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 67). X Start the engine. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐ sist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Select ESP with : or 9. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready to drive, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 242). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 213). Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Press a to confirm. Press 9 or : to select Collision Prevention. Prevention X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the Assistance Graphic menu. For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 65). X X Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select PRE-SAFE Brake Brake. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the Assistance Graphic menu. For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 71). Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐ sist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Use the : or 9 button to select Blind Spot Assist Assist. X Z On-board computer and displays Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. 205 Menus and submenus 206 Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 184). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 187). On-board computer and displays X For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 190). Head-up display submenu Selecting other displays Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select ATTENTION ASSIST ASSIST. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Off, Off Standard Sensitive. or Sensitive X Press the a button to confirm the selection. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the Assistance Graphic menu in the multifunction display. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 182). X Setting Lane Keeping Assist Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐ sist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Use the : or 9 button to select Lane Keeping Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection Standard or Adaptive appears. X To change the setting: press a again. X For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 186). : Vehicle speed display ; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction display = Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist Using the Display Content function, you can choose from up to four display options depending on the vehicle's equipment. The selected contents appear in the Head-up Display. In Mercedes-AMG or in Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the Head-up Display shows AMGspecific contents. If you select a display with traffic signs, detected traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in the Head-up Display. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Select with : or 9 Display Content. Content X Press a to confirm. A graphic selection list appears. X Press : or 9 to select the desired display. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. Menus and submenus Setting the position You can adjust the position of the Head-up Display on the windshield. You can compensate for height differences if the seat positions are changed, for example. X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 196). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Position function. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press : or 9 to adjust the position to a level from Level +5 (up) to Level -5 (down). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Using the Memory function, you can save and call up the set position of the Head-up Display as a single memory preset (Y page 105). Setting the brightness The brightness of the Head-up Display is automatically adjusted to the surrounding ambient light. You can also individually adjust the brightness of the Head-up Display. X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 196). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Brightness function. X Press the a button to save the setting. Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to a level from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5 (dark). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Light submenu Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off This function is not available in Canada. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Using : or 9, select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the multifunction display shows the cone of light and the W symbol in yellow. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on daytime running lampsDaytime Daytime Running Lights (Y page 107). Instrument cluster submenu Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. Z On-board computer and displays You can find more information on the navigation displays in the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual). Information on displays of Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 183). 207 Menus and submenus 208 Press : or 9 to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function. The current setting km or Miles appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. On-board computer and displays X The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: RDigital speedometer in the Trip menu and the trip odometer RTrip computer RCurrent consumption and the range RRange RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu RCruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot RASSYST PLUS service interval display ROdometer Switching the additional speedometer on/off If the additional speedometer is switched on, the speed is shown in the status bar in the multifunction display instead of the outside temperature. The speed display is inverse to the speedometer. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Using : or 9, select the Additional Speedometer [km/h] function. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. Restoring the factory settings Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Factory Settings submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears. X Press : or 9 to select No or Yes Yes. X Press a to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes, Yes the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset when the vehicle is stationary. AMG menu (Mercedes‑AMG and Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles) Warm-up : ; = ? A Digital speedometer Gear indicator Charge-air pressure Engine oil temperature Transmission fluid temperature Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Engine and transmission oil temperatures: when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperatures ? and A are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or A in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating X Menus and submenus SETUP Display in Mercedes-AMG vehicles G-Meter The G-Meter shows you the forces that are exerted on the driver during the journey, both laterally and in the direction of travel. The maximum values are indicated in red in the guideline system. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the GMeter appears. The maximum values of the G-Meter are saved. X To reset the G-Meter: press a again. X Using : or 9, select Yes on the steering wheel. X Press a to confirm. The maximum values of the G-Meter are deleted. Sport ++/Race Race Drive Comfort/Sport Comfort Sport/Sport Chassis Comfort/Sport Comfort Sport/Sport Sport + Transmission D/MM Exhaust system Comfort/Sport Comfort Sport + ESP® On On/Off Off or SPORT handling mode Sport SETUP shows the following functions and settings: Rthe gear indicator Rthe digital speedometer Rthe drive system setting Rthe suspension mode Rthe transmission position Rthe exhaust flap position Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status : ; = ? A Display in Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the G-Meter will be automatically reset. : Drive Eco/Comfort Eco Comfort/Sport Sport/Sport Sport +/Man‐ + Man‐ ual ; Chassis Comfort/Sport Comfort Sport/Sport Sport + = Steering Comfort Comfort/Sport Sport Z On-board computer and displays temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. 209 Menus and submenus 210 On-board computer and displays ? ECO Start/Stop Active Active/Inactive Inactive/Off Off A ESP® On/Off On Off or SPORT handling mode Sport SETUP shows the following functions and settings: Rthe gear indicator Rthe digital speedometer Rthe drive system setting Rthe suspension mode Rthe steering setting Rthe setting of the ECO start/stop function Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. X Starting a new lap Select SETUP Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears. X RACETIMER Displaying and starting RACETIMER : Lap ; RACETIMER = Quickest lap time Press the : or 9 button to select New Lap Lap. X Press a to confirm. X A maximum of 32 laps may be stored. Stopping the RACETIMER : Lap ; RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X X Press : or 9 to select Stop. Stop Press a to confirm. Display messages X X Press : or 9 to select Continue. Continue Press a to confirm. Resetting the RACETIMER Press : or 9 to select Stop. Stop The RACETIMER is stopped. X Press : or 9 to select Reset. Reset X Press a to confirm. All laps are deleted. X Lap statistics : ; = ? Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select Lap List List. X Press a to confirm. The lap evaluation appears. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone. You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible. Z On-board computer and displays Continuing the RACETIMER 211 Display messages 212 On-board computer and displays When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 163) RParking (Y page 145) Hiding display messages Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. X Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the message memory. If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction display. When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages. Display messages 213 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily not available. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X !÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷ and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z On-board computer and displays Safety systems On-board computer and displays 214 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. F(USA only)!(Canada only) Turn On the Igni‐ tion to Release the Parking Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Switch on the ignition. F(USA only)!(Canada The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 146). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. only) Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually. ing Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 146). F(USA only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Z 215 On-board computer and displays Display messages 216 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X or X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 146). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: X Do not drive on. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 331). X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: Shift the transmission to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 146). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 146). X F(USA only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake Inop‐ erative The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 217 218 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. $(USA only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. USA only: the $ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the Check Brake Pad Wear engine is running. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Restart the engine. Inoperative Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus Inoperative COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Inopera‐ tive See Operator's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Man‐ ual PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation RMercedes-AMG or Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Restart the engine. X Mercedes-AMG or Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles: activate ESP® again (Y page 69). PRE-SAFE Functions Limited See Opera‐ tor's Manual PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 219 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 220 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Man‐ ual The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: RDirt on sensors RHeavy rain or snow RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable: RPRE-SAFE® PLUS Brake RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and drive safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Switch off the engine. X Clean all sensors (Y page 290). X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. RPRE-SAFE® 6 SRS Malfunction Ser‐ vice Required The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). 6 Front Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 221 On-board computer and displays Display messages 222 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated during the journey although: bag Disabled See Operator's Manual Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag will not be triggered in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the frontpassenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 51) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐ abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 51). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled during the journey although: bag Enabled See Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag and the front-passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and frontpassenger knee bag (Y page 51) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐ abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 223 224 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 51). Lights Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The bulb in question is malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). Check Left Low Beam (Example) X i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed. b Active Headlamps Inoperative b Malfunction See Operator’s Manual b Auto Lamp Function Inoperative b Switch Off Lights b Switch On Headlamps The active light function is malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to the à position. You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off. Turn the light switch to the L or à position. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Operator's Man‐ ual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine X cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 284). If you have to add coolant frequently: X ? Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked. The fan motor is malfunctioning. At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. X Z 225 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 226 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge. If the temperature increases again: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). # See Operator's Man‐ ual The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The battery condition of charge is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Leave the engine running. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. # Start Engine See Operator's Manual The engine is switched off and the condition of charge is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster and interior lighting. X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance. The battery is being charged. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth- erwise be damaged. Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 283). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 283). X If you have to add engine oil frequently: Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X Z 227 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 228 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) (USA) Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 Liter) (Canada) ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. X X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 283). If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 283). If you have to add engine oil frequently: Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X 4 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off 8 Fuel Level Low C 8 Gas Cap Loose Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 283). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 283). The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Refuel at the nearest gas station. X There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. X The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 229 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! À ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ¨ The vehicle is rising to the level you have selected. ¨ The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. ¨ You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Vehicle Rising Vehicle Rising Please Wait Stop Vehicle Vehi‐ cle Too Low AIRMATIC is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ¨ Malfunction The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Driving systems On-board computer and displays 230 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Clean the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative or Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open. X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 170). Park Assist Inoper‐ ative PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty. X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 170). If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty. X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine. If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol does not appear in the multifunction display): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist Switched Off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 163). Off The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 163). DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 155). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 231 On-board computer and displays 232 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155). DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ ual DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Restart the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. erative The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist RPRE-SAFE® Brake RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DTR+: Steering Assist. Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Clean the windshield. DTR+: Steering Assist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are defective. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning. erative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control - - - mph RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. or X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 153). or X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 204). or X Reactivate ESP® in Mercedes-AMG or in Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles (Y page 69). Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated automatically (Y page 153). Z 233 On-board computer and displays Display messages 234 Display messages On-board computer and displays Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pressure Soon Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed new wheels and tires Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 295). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 317). Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 317). Run Flat Indicator Inoperative Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Please Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 317). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 319). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 295). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 317). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Warning Tire Mal‐ function The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle Ryou could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 295). Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavaila‐ ble Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved. TirePress. Sen‐ sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 235 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 236 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the transmission out of position P or N into another transmission position. X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine. Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Close the driver's door completely. The vehicle is moving. Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying tionary attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Reversing Not Possi‐ You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction. ble Service Required The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission components. A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to position N. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cool‐ ing The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Leave the engine running. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. N M The trunk lid is open. Close the trunk lid. X The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Close the hood. Z 237 On-board computer and displays Display messages 238 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages C Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. Close all the doors. X _ The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages. Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Lock Seat Backrest Front Left or Front Right Seat Backrest Not Locked Power Steering Mal‐ function See Opera‐ tor's Manual G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 285). Check Washer Fluid SmartKey Display messages  Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle  Take Your Key from Ignition Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. Use the correct SmartKey. X The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. a warning tone sounds X Remove the SmartKey. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 78).  Don't Forget Your Key The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. a warning tone sounds This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.  The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. Obtain a New Key Replace Key Battery Key Not Detected (white display message)  Key Not Detected (red display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Locate the SmartKey. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.  Remove 'Start' But‐ ton and Insert Key The SmartKey is continually undetected. The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 239 On-board computer and displays Display messages 240 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving. Safety Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning tone ceases. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 241 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Safety systems On-board computer and displays 242 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. $J ÷! N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow ESP® and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 68). ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 243 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 244 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 68). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked. M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles and Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC vehicles: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only activate SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 69). Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). Engine Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Z 245 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 246 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 284). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 284). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 248 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic. X Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 71). For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 65). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 249 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 295). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 317). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z On-board computer and displays Tires 250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Vehicle Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. General notes The multimedia system section in this Operator's Manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/ traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). However, it is recommended to install it at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs). G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Z 251 Multimedia system Function restrictions Operating system 252 Operating system Overview General notes Multimedia system Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely. Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the Ü button on the center console to the right of the controller. For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with selectable AMG Performance exhaust system: press the thumbwheel to the right of the controller. Adjusting the volume Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the controller. The volume is adjusted: Rfor the currently selected media source Rduring traffic or navigation announcements Rin hands-free mode during a phone call X Switching the sound on or off This function is not available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles with selectable AMG Performance exhaust system. Press the thumbwheel to the right of the controller. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. i Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted. X Functions The multimedia system has the following functions: RRadio mode mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system COMAND: navigation via the hard drive Audio 20: navigation via SD card RCommunication functions RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND) RVehicle functions with system settings RFavorites functions RMedia Controller The controller in the center console lets you: Rselect menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned 3 Rslid left or right 1 Rslid forwards or back 4 Rslid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7 Back button You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. Operating system Touchpad Switching the touchpad on/off Multimedia system: X VehicleQSystem System Set‐ Select Vehicle tings tingsQTouchpad TouchpadQActivate Activate Touch‐ pad pad. The touchpad is switched on O or off ª. Operating the touchpad Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this function: X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up or down with two fingers. X To increase or reduce the vehicle and sound settings: turn two fingers to the right or left. X To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. Character entry with handwriting recognition Entering characters Use one finger to write characters on the surface. The character is entered in the input line. If the character that you have entered can be interpreted in different ways, these character suggestions are displayed. X If character suggestions are shown, turn and press the controller. X Resume the character entry on the touchpad. X Handwriting recognition : Touch-sensitive surface ; Favorites button = Calls up audio and telephone menu (quick access) ? Returns to the previous display Navigating in menus and lists can be done via touch-sensitive surface : by swiping with your finger. To select the menu item: swipe up, down, to the left or right. X Press the touchpad. X To move the digital map: swipe in all directions. : ; = ? X Active input line Inserts a space Character entered on the touchpad Deletes characters (Example: COMAND) To display the menu: press the touchpad. X Z Multimedia system To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. X 253 Operating system 254 Quick access for audio Multimedia system Changing the station/music track : To exit the menu ; To return to handwriting recognition = To use the phone book or text templates (COMAND) ? To select the input line or changes the posi- tion of the cursor A To switch the language B To finish character entry X X To select the input line: select p. Swipe up or down. To move the cursor within the input line: select p. X Swipe to the left or right. X X To delete characters: swipe to the left if an input line is selected. X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad. Switching the text reader function of the handwriting recognition on/off Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem Vehicle System Set‐ tings tingsQRead Read Out Handwriting Recog‐ nition. nition The read-aloud function is switched on O or off ª. Depending on the audio source that is currently activated, you can use this function to select the next station or music track. X Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touchpad. The current audio source is displayed. X To select the previous or next station/ music track: glide to the right or left. The selected station/music track is played. Switching the character entry between touchpad and controller Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X To switch to the controller: press the controller. Character entry using the controller is active. X To switch to the touchpad: press the touchpad with your finger. Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is active. Favorites Calling up and exiting favorites To call up: press the g button on the controller or on the touchpad. X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle Vehicle. The favorites are displayed. X To exit: press the g button again. X Operating system Adding favorites Adding a predefined favorite 255 Important climate control functions can be set in the climate control bar: RTemperature RAirflow RAir distribution The climate control bar is visible in most displays. You can find all available climate control functions in the climate control menu. You can use the climate control bar to switch to the climate control menu. : ; = ? Multimedia system Overview Adds a new favorite Renames a selected favorite Moves a selected favorite Deletes a selected favorite Press the g button. Slide 6 the controller. The menu bar is shown. X Select Reassign Reassign. The categories are displayed. X Select a category. The favorites are displayed. X Select a favorite. X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Adding your own favorite Select VehicleQClimate Vehicle Climate Control. Control Press and hold the g button until the favorites are displayed. X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Climate control bar (COMAND) : Adjusts temperature, air distribution on the left and airflow, displays the current settings ; Calls up the climate control menu, displays the current cooling and climate mode settings = Adjusts temperature and air distribution on the right, displays the current settings There may be fewer settings or none depending on your vehicle's equipment. Calling up the climate control bar Multimedia system: Vehicle. Select Vehicle The vehicle menu is displayed. X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated. X Climate control settings General notes You can adjust the climate control settings using the climate control bar or the climate control menu. Z Operating system 256 Calling up the climate control menu Multimedia system: Select Vehicle. Vehicle The vehicle menu is displayed. X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated. X To select from climate control bar ;: turn and press the controller. The menu for selecting climate control functions is activated. X To select a climate function: turn and press the controller. The selected climate control function appears. Multimedia system X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 256). X To select Ionization: Ionization turn and press the controller. The setting element is active. X To switch the ionization on or off: turn the controller. X To exit the menu: press the % button. X Settings in the bottom bar of the climate control menu Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off Call up the climate control menu (Y page 256). X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the bottom bar is activated. X To select O A/C A/C: turn and press the controller. X Switch cooling with air dehumidification on O or off ª. X Settings in the climate menu Adjusting the climate mode settings The climate mode determines the type of airflow. The setting is active when the air-conditioning system is set to à (Y page 118). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 256). X To select Climate Mode Mode: turn and press the controller. X To change the setting: turn the controller. X To exit the menu: press the % button. The climate mode bar displays the current airflow setting: DIFFUSE DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS. FOCUS Starting/stopping the perfume atomizer The perfume atomizer makes it possible to scent the air in individual compartments in the vehicle interior. Further information (Y page 121). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 256). X To select Air Freshener Freshener: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active. X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press the controller. X To set the intensity: turn the controller when the atomizer is switched on. X To exit the menu: press the % button. Switching the ionization on/off The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in the vehicle interior. Further information (Y page 122). i The current status of the cooling function is displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON – activated, A/C OFF – deactivated. i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function reduces fuel consumption. Synchronizing the climate control settings Use O Sync (synchronization) to select the climate control setting for all zones together O or separately ª. X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 256). X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the bottom bar is activated. X To select O Sync Sync: turn and press the controller. X Switch the synchronization function on O or off ª. For further information on synchronizing climate control settings, see (Y page 119). Operating system Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (only available in the USA). RCalculate Alternative Routes Different routes are being calculated. Instead Start, select the Continue menu item. of Start X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options Options. X Select a route option. Notes for route options: You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system. Toll Roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the USA) Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes. Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated. General notes Entering an address Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Multimedia system: Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: X NaviQNavigation Navigation. Select Navi X No route guidance active: select QRoute Route Settings. Settings i If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the controller and show the menu. X Select a route type. Notes for route types: RUse Select Navi NaviQNavigation Navigation. No route guidance active: select Destina‐ tionQAddress Entry tion Address Entry. i If route guidance is active, first slide 6 the controller and show the menu. Enter an address, e.g. as follows: Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number Rcountry, city or ZIP code Rcity or ZIP code, center Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection X Select City. City The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out. X Enter the city. The G symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times. X To switch to the list: slide the 5 controller. X Select the location. If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are different ZIP codes available for the location, X X REco Route Calculates an economic route. RDynamic Traffic Route Z Multimedia system Navigation mode 257 258 Operating system the corresponding digits are displayed with an X. X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu. Further options for destination entry: Multimedia system Rfree destination search The free destination search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates Calculating the route Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue Continue. The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐ tination. tination Yes cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list. Connecting a mobile phone Prerequisites For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Multimedia system: Select Vehicle VehicleQSystem System Set‐ tingsQActivate Activate Bluetooth. Bluetooth tings X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RMessages i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be obtained on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. Searching for and authorizing a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular Operating system X Select Tel/ Tel/®QConnect Connect DeviceQSearch Phones Start Device Search for PhonesQStart Search . The available mobile phones are displayed. COMAND: Select Phone PhoneQConnect Connect Device Search for PhonesQStart DeviceQSearch Phones Start Search. Search The available mobile phones are displayed. Symbols in the device list X Symbol Explanation Ï New mobile phone found, not yet authorized. Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected # Mobile phone is authorized and connected Connecting a mobile phone Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system. X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization. Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): Select Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey. X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. Multimedia system: X X Select Connect Device. Device Select a mobile phone from the device list. Media mode General notes If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Further information on media mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). The following external media sources can be used: RApple® RUSB RCD devices (e.g. iPhone®) devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) RDVD (COMAND) cards Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth® RSD Activating media mode Multimedia system: Select Media MediaQDevices Devices. The available media sources will be shown. X Select the media source. Playable files are played. X Z Multimedia system security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Audio 20: 259 Operating system 260 Inserting and removing an SD card Important safety notes G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Multimedia system ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card. Inserting an SD card The SD card slot is located in the stowage compartment under the armrest. X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face downwards. X Select the media source (Y page 259). Removing an SD card Press the memory card. The memory card is ejected. X Remove the memory card. X Connecting USB devices There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Connect the USB device to the USB port. X Select the media source (Y page 259). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle iden- tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 261). Z Stowage and features Stowage areas 261 Stowage areas 262 Stowage compartments in the front Eyeglasses compartment Glove box To open: press marking :. The eyeglasses compartment opens down. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage and features X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. X Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example, can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles with a perfume atomizer (Y page 121) the storage space of the glove box is restricted. Stowage compartment in the front center console X The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key (Y page 77). X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position 1. Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover : swings upwards. Stowage compartment under the armrest X To open: press button : at the front. The stowage space opens. Stowage areas Stowage compartment in the doors In the stowage space : in the doors, you can store bottles with a capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l), a rolled-up fluorescent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle document wallet (frontpassenger door). Additional stowage space Depending on the equipment, the following additional stowage areas are available in the vehicle: Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard above the light switch (not suitable for holding thin objects such as shopping tokens) Rthe open stowage compartment in the center console Rstowage net in front-passenger footwell Rthe parcel net on the left-hand side in the cargo compartment Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 261) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 261). Rear bench seat through-loading feature Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged. ! When folding the rear seat backrest for- wards, ensure that there are no items lying on the seat cushions. These items could otherwise be damaged or could themselves damage the rear seats. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 261). The outside and the middle rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the trunk capacity. The division ratio is 45/10/45. Folding the rear seat backrests forward Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward. X Vehicles with memory function: when one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded forward, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. X Open the trunk. X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head restraints. X Z Stowage and features Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage space: Ran SD card slot Ra multimedia connector unit with two USB ports, e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player; see the Digital Operator's Manual Ra mobile phone bracket Ra small stowage space in the upper front section 263 Stowage areas 264 Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Left and right seat backrest Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. Stowage and features X Left and right seat backrest Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. X Middle rear seat backrest X Pull release lever = forwards. Rear seat backrest ; is released. Middle rear seat backrest Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. X Fold corresponding rear seat backrest ; forward. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 98). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the through-loading feaX Stowage areas 265 ture. This will prevent unauthorized access to the trunk from the vehicle interior. In order to prevent the trunk from being accessed by unauthorized persons, the center seat backrest can be locked using a catch. The center seat backrest can only be folded forward together with the left seat backrest. X To lock:fold the left and center seat backrests forward. Make sure that the center and left seat backrests are engaged and joined together. X Slide catch : upwards. X To unlock: fold the left and center seat backrests forward. X Slide catch : downwards. Securing loads Vehicles with the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: X Fold up the cargo tie-down rings next to the rear seat backrest and put them through the slots in the carpet. Bag hook G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load. Cargo tie-down rings Observe the following notes on securing loads: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 261). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :. Z Stowage and features Locking the center rear seat backrest Stowage areas 266 Parcel net Stowage and features Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Stowage well under the trunk floor The following items are located beneath the cargo compartment floor: RThe folding box Rthe vehicle tool kit Rthe TIREFIT ! Unhook the handle before again before closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. X To open: pull handle : up. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Observe the following notes: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 261). Attaching the parcel net Roof carrier Vehicles with rear bench seat throughloading facility: fold up the front cargo tiedown rings and push them through the slots in the carpet. X Attach parcel net : to the front and rear cargo tie-down rings. X Important safety notes G WARNING When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Features Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 344). 267 Carefully open covers : in the direction of the arrow and fold upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. If a roof carrier is installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. Attaching the roof carrier Features Cup holder Important safety notes G WARNING The cup holder cannot hold a container secure whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst traveling, the container may be flung around and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may be distracted from the traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Z Stowage and features use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you can: Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully Ropen the trunk lid fully 268 Features ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. ! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center console can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 261). Stowage and features Cup holder in the front center console : ; = ? A Mirror light Bracket Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 262). X To remove: slide catch = forwards and pull out cup holder ;. X To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide back catch =. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only. Sun visors Overview G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Features To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 262). X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its right side =. X To remove the insert: hold the sides of insert ?, push it forward and lift it up ; and out. X To install the insert: press insert ? into the holder until it engages. X To close: close the cover of the ashtray. X Push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X 269 Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. i You can remove the ashtray insert and use Rear compartment ashtray Cigarette lighter (example) Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 262). X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. To remove the insert: push ribbing = from the left side and pull insert : upwards. X To install the insert: install insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages. X X 12 V sockets General notes Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. X Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Ra Z Stowage and features the resulting compartment for stowage. Features 270 If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. This prevents the cover from being blocked. Stowage and features Socket in the front center console Example: 12 V socket To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 262). X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X Socket in the rear compartment center console X X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. Lift up the cover of socket :. mbrace General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To register, press the ï Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center. The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the multimedia system volume control. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RInfo call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. Features Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehiRthe cle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 270). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Z Stowage and features A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button does not light up during the system self-diagnosis RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - Info call buttonï Rafter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐ ative or Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 271 Features 272 Making an emergency call To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second ;. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :. Stowage and features X If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if mbrace has successfully made the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Roadside Assistance button X To call: press Roadside Assistance button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 275). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. Info call button X To call: press Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call button is flashing continuously Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia system to end the voice call When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to the multimedia system. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Downloading destinations Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Z 273 Stowage and features Features Features 274 Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 SelectYes the controller and confirm with 7. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. The destination download function is available if: Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. Stowage and features X Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. You can use the route assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section. Search & Send General notes To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system. Specifying and sending the destination address Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field. X To send the destination address to the email address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the website. Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field. X Click "Send". Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website. X Calling up a transmitted destination address Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started. X SelectYes Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller and confirm with 7. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately. Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles. X Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Android™) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Vehicle remote closing The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be valet locked remotely. The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Android™) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle. If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified. X Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. Z 275 Stowage and features Features Stowage and features 276 Features You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐ nected message in the display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be started, the Request for Vehicle Diagnostics Received Start vehicle diagnostics? message appears in the display. X Press the Yes button to confirm the message. X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please Start Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehi‐ cle to a safe position. message appears: please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. The message in the display disappears. The vehicle operating state check begins. You will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Active message. If you select Cancel, Cancel the Vehicle Health Check is canceled completely. When the check is complete, the Sending vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ nection may be interrupted during data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent. X Press the OK button to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ ring Data... message appears. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone. Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop. This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 31). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 28). Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Each route can include up to four way points. Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the Do you want to start route guidance? Destination Received destination has been saved in "Previous destinations". message on the multimedia system display. The route is saved. X To start route guidance: select Yes Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. If you select No, No the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu. X Select Start. Start Route guidance starts. Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again. Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area. These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an Info call and notify the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo-fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message. Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 29). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Programming Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 277). Z 277 Stowage and features Features 278 Features Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Stowage and features Synchronizing the rolling code Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. If the selected button has already been programed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The rolling code must be synchronized (Y page 278). X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 277). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: you live in Canada Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press and hold button B on remote control A again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Rif Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of remote control A for the garage door drive. The garage door opener is compatible with devices which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from buttons ; to ? which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control A is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control A. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Z 279 Stowage and features Features Features 280 Clearing the memory Stowage and features Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the relevant seat back. To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X X Engine compartment Hood Important safety notes G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rnever Rremove jewelry and watches items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Rkeep Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X Z Maintenance and care Engine compartment 281 Engine compartment 282 G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch Maintenance and care X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Closing the hood Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Radiator Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a thermal mat or insect protection cover. Otherwise, the values of the European on-board diagnostics may be affected. Some of these readings are required by law and must be accurate at all times. Engine oil Important safety notes G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Rnever G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. Engine compartment Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (example) X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again after approximately three seconds. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. Adding engine oil list of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system: RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired RUse of engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Add engine oil (example) X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 283). Further information on engine oil (Y page 341). H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with a service system. A Z Maintenance and care When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: the oil level must be checked only when the engine is at normal operating temperature. 283 284 Engine compartment Additional service products Important safety notes G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. Checking coolant level Maintenance and care G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Rnever G WARNING The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Check the coolant level (example) Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). or X Press the Start/Stop button twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function (Y page 125). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster (Y page 194). The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). or X Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function (Y page 125). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ;. X ASSYST PLUS X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 342). Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Adding liquid to the windshield washer system (example) X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab and open. X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt (1.0 l), a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 238). Further information on washer fluid (Y page 343). ASSYST PLUS Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 282). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in XX Days A Due RService A Overdue by XX Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, indicates the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. RService Hiding a service message X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages X X Switch on the ignition. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. Z Maintenance and care G WARNING 285 Care 286 Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the Service menu and confirm with a. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm with a. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display Maintenance and care ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Care General notes ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time. H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Care ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed Rthe blower is switched off Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0 Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera is switched off The vehicle may otherwise be damaged ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in neutral position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ROperating with the SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. ROperating with the Start/Stop button: Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N neutral: Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop button: X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. Operating with the Start/Stop button only: X Engage park position P. X Release the brake pedal. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 125). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop button: X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if necessary. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. Z Maintenance and care After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. 287 Care 288 Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter. X Power washers Maintenance and care G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: RTires RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. RElectrical components RBattery RConnectors RLamps RSeals RTrim RVentilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. ! Edition 1 special model: parts of your vehi- cle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm) between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. ! Edition 1 special model: parts of your vehi- cle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm) between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. Care Use tar remover to remove tar stains. Use silicone remover to remove wax. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has penetrated the paint surface. Also use Paint Cleaner on paint that has become dull. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB TouchUp Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Matte finish care ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products X ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of automatic car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Cleaning the vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time. Cleaning the windows G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. Z Maintenance and care X 289 290 Care ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Cleaning wiper blades Maintenance and care G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield (Y page 113). X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera and 360° camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera or 360° camera with a power washer. Care or Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). Press the Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESSGO start function (Y page 125). X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual). X To clean the camera: use clean water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X The camera cover closes automatically Rif you are driving at speeds greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). Rif the ignition is switched off. Cleaning the exhaust pipes G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers should not be polished with a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Commercially available engine and care oils are suitable for this. For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paintwork polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove the excess polish residue after polishing. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. Rabrasive Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit. Z Maintenance and care X X 291 Care 292 ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or Maintenance and care sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Cleaning the steering wheel and selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Trim elements with piano black finish: clean with a soft, damp cloth and a commercially available soap solution. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover. Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Rdifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Care 293 Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Maintenance and care Cleaning the headliner and carpets Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Z 294 Where will I find...? Where will I find...? Information on reflective safety jackets Reflective safety jacket Breakdown assistance Removing/replacing the reflective safety jacket The reflective safety jackets are located in the safety jacket compartments in the stowage compartments. X To remove: pull out safety jacket bag : with the reflective safety jacket by loop ;. X Open safety jacket bag : and pull out the reflective safety jacket. X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :. X Slide safety jacket bag : along the lower edge of the armrest into the safety jacket compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that loop ; hangs out well within reach. i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from its packaging material before sliding it into the safety jacket compartment. The packaging material may otherwise cause it to slip out or make removing it difficult. Observe the legal requirements in each country. : ; = ? A B C Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not use a laundry dryer Do not dry-clean This is a class 2 jacket RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require- ments defined by the legal standard only: - if the correct size is used - if the safety jackets are correctly fastened RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety jackets are clean and intact. The special properties may otherwise be compromised. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored in their original packaging in a dry place away from sources of heat and light. RThe maximum number of washes specified is not the only factor influencing the life span of the reflective safety jackets. Their life span also depends on use, care, storage, etc. RThe reflective safety jackets should be disposed of and replaced with new ones: - after 15 washes, and/or - if the reflective strips have become scratched, and/or - if the backing material and/or reflective strips have become soiled and cannot be cleaned off, and/or - if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the effects of sunlight RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an environmentally responsible manner. To do so, contact your local waste disposal company. Flat tire General notes The towing eye is located in the stowage well under the trunk floor. In vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) the towing eye is in a bracket under the parcel shelf. Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tire changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench RRatchet wrench RAlignment bolt Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit Vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) To remove the towing eye: open the trunk lid. X Pull towing eye : to the left and remove it. X To replace the towing eye: slide towing eye : with the thread into the rear end of the bracket. X Push towing eye : towards the right on the eyelet, until it engages in the holder. X Flat tire Preparing the vehicle : Tire inflation compressor ; Tire sealant filler bottle Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 266). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 297). X X Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 296) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 295) Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and mounting wheels (Y page 330). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. Breakdown assistance Vehicle tool kit 295 Flat tire 296 Switch off the engine. Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 128). X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Breakdown assistance X MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 325). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions sages (Y page 234). Rcheck in the display mes- the tire for damage. driving on, observe the following notes. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). Rif In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: RVehicle speed RRoad condition ROutside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rthe type and Rthe "MOExtended" mark If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tires). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou Rthe hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Flat tire see smoke and smell rubber. RESP® is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. TIREFIT kit RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Using the TIREFIT kit Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 295). X RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Z Breakdown assistance Ryou 297 Flat tire 298 Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. X Remove filler hose B and connector = from the bottom section of tire inflation compressor housing ;. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant filler bottle : until the connector engages. X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the mounting of tire inflation compressor ;. The cap must engage in both hooks. Breakdown assistance X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug = into cigarette lighter socket (Y page 269) or into another 12 V socket in your vehicle (Y page 269). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation compressor to ON position. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. X First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 299). If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 298). If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is unscrewed. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Flat tire G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. The maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is unscrewed. Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is unscrewed. X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire. X X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X Z Breakdown assistance Tire pressure reached 299 Battery (vehicle) 300 Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) 12 V battery – important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 63) and (Y page 67). All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery: G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with Battery (vehicle) All vehicles: H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! Always have work on batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, observe the following: Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Rswitch off the ignition. Ralways disconnect the negative terminal clamp first, followed by the positive terminal clamp. After the battery has been disconnected, the transmission is locked in position P. After the work has been done, install the battery and replace the cover of the positive terminal clamp firmly. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Observe this Operator's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Z Breakdown assistance plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. 301 302 Jump-starting Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.4 V. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery: ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. Breakdown assistance G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. All vehicles: ! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 302). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 302). Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by MercedesBenz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery: if the warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at low temperatures, do not charge a battery which has been removed using a battery charger. Allow the battery to warm up gently first, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and the starting characteristics impaired, especially at low temperatures. Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine compartment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point. Jump-starting 303 All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up on the instrument cluster when temperatures are low, it is probably because the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles: ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Z Breakdown assistance During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. 304 Jump-starting RAll vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 125). X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Breakdown assistance RJump-starting Position number C identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device. X Lift up panel B. X Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery C using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery C to ground point ? of your vehicle using the jumper cable. Connecting jumper cable to second battery C first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. Towing and tow-starting 305 First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ? and negative terminal =, then from positive clamp : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover A of positive terminal : after removing jumper cables. X Fold panel B shut. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. X i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 338). Rthe ! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot engine is not running. brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system. If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely. Rthe G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could become damaged. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery. This could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Shift the automatic transmission to N and do not open the driver's or front passenger's door during towing. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position P, which could damage the transmission. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. Z Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting 306 Towing and tow-starting Breakdown assistance ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. If the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N, have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N Disarm the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 82). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular care when removing the rear cover. The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and at the front, under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 295). X Press the mark on cover : inwards and remove. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it. Removing the towing eye Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Put the towing eye back into the vehicle tool kit. X X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the rear axle raised. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towed with the rear axle raised. The Towing and tow-starting ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged. Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or frontpassenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 109). In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. X Transporting the vehicle 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission All vehicles ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. X Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 302). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Z Breakdown assistance vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise swerve or even roll over. 307 308 Fuses Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 302). Fuses Important safety notes Breakdown assistance G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the trunk (Y page 309). If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Before changing a fuse Observe the important safety notes (Y page 308) X Switch off the engine. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 125). or X When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 125). X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell RFuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side RFuse box under the trunk floor on the righthand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Dashboard fuse box The fuse box is under a cover on the side of the dashboard. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. X X Open the front-passenger door. To open: fold cover : out towards the rear and remove it. Fuses X To close: clip in cover : at the rear. Fold cover : forwards until it engages. Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. X Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten screws =. X Insert cover ; on both sides and engage safety clips :. X Close the hood. X Fuse box in the trunk Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 266). X To open: swing cover : upwards in the direction of the arrow. X X Open the hood (Y page 281). To open: press safety clips : on cover ; together. X Remove fuse box cover ; upwards. X X X To close: fold down cover : in the opposite direction to the arrow. Make sure that the cover is in the recess provided for it. i The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse allocation chart. Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ? and remove it. X To close: check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid ?. X Z Breakdown assistance X 309 310 Operation Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel Operation When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Information on driving Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel Wheels and tires Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 335). You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 320) Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 313) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 313) G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rimmediately Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Notes on high performance tires G WARNING Due to the special tire tread in combination with the optimized rubber compound, there is an increased risk of hydroplaning and skidding on damp or wet road surfaces. In addition, tire traction is significantly reduced at low outside temperatures and low tire-operating temperatures. There is a risk of an accident. Operation i Different driving styles may lead to high tire wear and the tires may reach the minimum tire tread depth after only a short time. Regular checking of wheels and tires G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. Check wheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures in the tires Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 311). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 313). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style RTire pressure RDistance covered Notes on tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. RM+S Wheels and tires Activate ESP® and adapt your driving style. At outside temperatures below 50 ‡ (10 †), use M+S tires. 311 Marking : shows where the bar indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Z 312 Winter operation Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 296). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. M+S tires Wheels and tires MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by MercedesBenz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 296). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 330). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted the M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 316). X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 317). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 319). Tire pressure G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheeltire combinations (Y page 335). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 31 mph (50 km/h). ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been installed (Y page 165). RWhen snow chains are installed, never use Active Parking Assist (Y page 170). You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains installed: RAll vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles and Mercedes‑Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC) (Y page 68) RMercedes‑AMG vehicles (Y page 69) RMercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC (Y page 69) You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications Important safety notes G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rif The data on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle. General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tires Snow chains 313 314 Tire pressure Tire and Loading Information placard : Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 320). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Wheels and tires Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example). The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example). Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 325). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap (Y page 143) Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Underinflated tires may: leading to tire defects Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Roverheat, Overinflated tires G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Z Wheels and tires Important notes on tire pressure 315 316 Tire pressure Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage Maximum tire pressures Wheels and tires : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 313). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 313). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 143) Rin the "Tire pressure" section Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 313). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Tire pressure loss warning system General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 317). Important safety notes The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 313). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the Tire pressure Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure Rchanged the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 313). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up the menu list. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐ sure. sure X Press a to confirm. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message is shown in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display. X Select Yes with 9 or :. X Press a to confirm. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X or Press the % button. If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, press 9 or : to select Can‐ cel. cel X Press a to confirm. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tire pressure monitor General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display; see illustration (example). Z Wheels and tires same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). 317 318 Tire pressure Information on the message display can be found in the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 319). Wheels and tires Important safety notes G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 313). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 319). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 313). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. Tire pressure Checking the tire pressure electronically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up the menu list. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐ sure. sure X Press a to confirm. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure of each wheel. If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the following message appears: Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes minutes. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. X Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked. Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 234). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values Z Wheels and tires The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 234). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. 319 Loading the vehicle Wheels and tires 320 for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. You can find more tire pressure values for various operating conditions in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap. Observe the notes on tire pressure when doing so (Y page 313). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Press ò on the steering wheel to call up the menu list. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐ sure. sure X Press a to confirm. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure of each wheel or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐ erence Values message is shown on the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown on the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressure values are within the specified range. The new tire pressure values are then used as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCC ID: MRXGG4 FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4 Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC: 2546A-GG4 IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the Bpillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. Loading the vehicle 321 Number of seats : B-pillar, driver's side Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Determining the correct load limit Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value. X i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of availZ Wheels and tires Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehiclespecific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. 322 Loading the vehicle able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 320). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Wheels and tires Step 2 All about wheels and tires 323 Step 3 Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 320). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible load that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 RTraction grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. Z Wheels and tires Example 1 324 All about wheels and tires i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Wheels and tires Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 311). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 312). Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. All about wheels and tires Overview : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 328) ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 327) Maximum tire load (Y page 327) Maximum tire pressure (Y page 316) Manufacturer Tire material (Y page 328) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 325) D Load index (Y page 327) E Tire name = ? A B C The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. : ; = ? A B Tire width Nominal aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load bearing index Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width:tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code:tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size Z Wheels and tires Tire labeling 325 All about wheels and tires 326 description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 320). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 327). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 327). Speed rating:speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. Wheels and tires i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires 1 ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of loadbearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR",and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Q Speed rating M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) Index Speed rating T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) Or M+S i for winter tires. i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). All about wheels and tires The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 335). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. 327 Maximum load rating Load index Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 320). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the Z Wheels and tires In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this after the letter that identifies the speed rating (Y page 325). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure 328 All about wheels and tires requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 335). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked "3214" was manufactured in week 32 in 2014. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Wheels and tires Tire characteristics Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. All about wheels and tires Speed rating Maximum load rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum permissible tire pressure The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment Rthe Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. Z Wheels and tires GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) 329 330 Changing a wheel Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Wheels and tires Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 295) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 296). Rotating the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 331). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 317) or the tire pressure monitor (Y page 319). Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if Changing a wheel the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. 331 Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Mounting a wheel Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Normal" on vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 165). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 125). X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 128). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. X If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 295). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Wheels and tires Preparing the vehicle X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack Z 332 Changing a wheel must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: Wheels and tires RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe- cific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RDo not place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Two different variants can be installed. Vehicles with plastic hub cap: To remove: turn the center cover of hub cap : counter-clockwise and remove. X To install: before installing, ensure that hub cap : is in the open position. To do this, turn the center cover counter-clockwise. X Position hub cap : and turn the center cover clockwise until hub cap : engages physically and audibly. X Make sure that hub cap : is installed securely. X Vehicles with aluminum hub cap: To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 295). X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Position lug wrench = on socket ;. X Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X To install: before installing, check hub cap : and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary. X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in the right position. X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and tighten hub cap :. X Changing a wheel 333 The tightening torque must be 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). i Note that the hub cap should be tightened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ? upwards. X Position jack B at jacking point A. X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers installed next to the jacking points on the outer sills. Wheels and tires X X Turn crank C clockwise until jack B sits completely on jacking point A. The base of the jack must lie evenly on the ground. X Turn crank C until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. X Z Changing a wheel 334 Removing a wheel ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic- brake disc: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, you should proceed carefully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when braking. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 330). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic- brake disc: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, you should proceed carefully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt. Wheels and tires ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight. X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Wheel-tire combination G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 313). When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. X Wheel-tire combination You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap Z Wheels and tires Lowering the vehicle 335 336 Wheel-tire combination Wheels and tires Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 313). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rwith the same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 296). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle electronics Information regarding technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Vehicle electronics Installing two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING 337 In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Robserve the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. Approved antenna positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear fender ? Trunk lid Installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for accessory parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplement when installing. Deviations with respect to frequency bands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Technical data The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 338 Identification plates The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values: Technical data Frequency band Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio system/ Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands: RTrunked radio system/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Location of vehicle identification plate (example, left-hand-drive vehicle) X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) : VIN ; Vehicle model Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) : VIN ; Paint code Service products and filling capacities i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) 339 Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering ; upwards. The VIN is visible :. X The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 338). The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 339). Engine number : Engine number (stamped into the crank- case) ; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) = Emission control information plate, includ- ing the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must match. Only use products recommended by MercedesBenz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Technical data Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. 340 Service products and filling capacities Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 Important safety notes Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Technical data Mercedes-AMG vehicles Approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l) Approx. 1.8 US gal (7.0 l) Gasoline G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. Tank capacity All models Of which reserve All other models Fuel Model Model Total capacity 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol) (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. RE85 ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. Service products and filling capacities i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 143). Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The fuel quality available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Engine oil General notes ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec- ification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 339). The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Model All models MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.5 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. Z Technical data If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. 341 342 Service products and filling capacities Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model Capacity Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC Mercedes‑AMG vehicles C 300 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) C 300 4MATIC 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Brake fluid Technical data G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 339). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop in accordance with the replacement intervals and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling coolant (Y page 339). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: RAnti-corrosion protection RAntifreeze protection RRaising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). Service products and filling capacities The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked with every mainte- nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. 343 spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 339). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Filling capacities Capacity Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC 11.5 US qt (10.9 l) Mercedes-AMG vehicles 11.7 US qt (11.1 l) All other models 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) Windshield washer system Important safety notes G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member. ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or replacing component parts, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The Z Technical data Model 344 Vehicle data Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant Dimensions and weights Warning symbol : advises you about: RPossible dangers RHaving service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Technical data Filling capacities Model Refrigerant All models 22.2 ± 0.4 oz (630 ± 10 g) Model PAG oil Mercedes-AMG vehicles 4.2 oz (120 g) All other models 2.8 oz (80 g) Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model : Opening height C 300 71.1 in (1805 mm) C 300 4MATIC 71.4 in (1813 mm) All other models Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC Vehicle length 184.9 in (4696 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.4 in (2016 mm) Vehicle height 55.3 in (1405 mm) Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm) Vehicle data Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC 345 All other models Turning radius Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) Mercedes-AMG vehicles Vehicle length 187.0 in (4750 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.4 in (2016 mm) Vehicle height, Mercedes-AMG C 63 55.1 in (1400 mm) Vehicle height, Mercedes-AMG C 63 S 55.2 in (1402 mm) Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm) 37.0 ft (11.29 m) Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) Technical data Turning radius All other models Vehicle length 184.5 in (4686 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.4 in (2016 mm) Vehicle height, C 300 55.3 in (1405 mm) Vehicle height, C 300 4MATIC 55.6 in (1413 mm) Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm) Turning circle, C 300 36.8 ft (11.22 m) Turning circle, C 300 4MATIC 37.6 ft (11.45 m) Z 346 347 348